Copyright: Copyright (c) 1993 WordPerfect Corporation
Citation: Copyright (c) 1993 WordPerfect Corporation. All rights reserved.


Align

Arrange, Align

Use the options on the Align menu to align selected items.  You can center items or align them horizontally or vertically.  If one item is selected, it is aligned within the drawing window.  If two or more items are selected, they are aligned in relation to each other.

Left

Right

Top

Bottom

Center Left/Right

Center Top/Bottom

Center Both


Center Left/Right

Arrange, Align, Center Left/Right

Use Center Left/Right to center an item horizontally in the drawing window or to arrange a group of items horizontally in the selection area.

To center items from the left or right,

1	Select the items you want to center.

2	Choose Align from the Arrange menu, then choose Center Left/Right.

See Also

Center Both

Center Top/Bottom


Center Top/Bottom

Arrange, Align, Center Top/Bottom

Use Center Top/Bottom to center an item vertically in the drawing window or to arrange a selected group of items vertically in the selection area.

To center items from the top and bottom,

1	Select the items you want to center.

2	Choose Align from the Arrange menu, then choose Center Top/Bottom.

See Also

Center Both

Center Left/Right


Align Left

Arrange, Align, Left

Use Left to move an item to the left border of the drawing window or to arrange more than one item at the left edge of the selection area.

To move items to the left,

1	Select the item or items you want to align.

2	Choose Align from the Arrange menu, then choose Left.

See Also

Align Bottom

Align Right

Align Top


Align Right

Arrange, Align, Right

Use Right to move an item to the right border of the drawing window or to arrange more than one item at the right edge of the selection area.

To move items to the right,

1	Select the item items you want to align.

2	Choose Align from the Arrange menu, then choose Right.

See Also

Align Bottom

Align Left

Align Top


Align Top

Arrange, Align, Top

Use Top to move an item to the top border of the drawing window or to arrange more than one item at the top edge of the selection area.

To move items to the top,

1	Select the item or items you want to align.

2	Choose Align from the Arrange menu, then choose Top.

See Also

Align Bottom

Align Left

Align Right


Align Bottom

Arrange, Align, Bottom

Use Bottom to move an item to the bottom border of the drawing window or to arrange more than one item at the bottom edge of the selection area.

To move items to the bottom,

1	Select the item or items you want to align.

2	Choose Align from the Arrange menu, then choose Bottom.

See Also

Align Left

Align Right

Align Top


Center Both

Arrange, Align, Center Both

Use Center Both to center an  item horizontally and vertically in the drawing window or to arrange several items horizontally and vertically in the selection area.

To center items vertically and horizontally,

1	Select the items you want to center.

2	Choose Align from the Arrange menu, then choose Center Both.

See Also

Center Left/Right

Center Top/Bottom


Brush Attributes

Draw, Bitmap, Attributes, Brush

Use Brush Attributes in an open or new bitmap drawing to choose a brush size and shape for the following tools:

 Paint Brush

 Air Brush

 Eraser

 Selective Eraser

To specify brush attributes in a bitmap drawing,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, choose Brush from the Attributes menu.

3	Choose a brush shape from the Shapes pop-up list.

4	Specify a Brush Width.

5	Specify the Air Brush Density if your current tool is the Air Brush.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Air Brush

Attributes

Eraser

Paint Brush

Selective Eraser


 Hint

The higher the value you specify, the wider the brush will become.


 Hint

The higher the value you specify, the more dense the Air Brush spray will become.


Color Attributes

Attributes, Color

Draw, Bitmap, Attributes, Color

Use Color Attributes to choose the Line, Fill, and Text colors for your objects, bitmap images, and text.

To choose line and fill colors,

1	Choose Color from the Attributes menu.

2	Select the Line, Fill, or Text options you want.

3	Choose a color from the color palette for each option.

or... Choose Retrieve to retrieve a color palette you have created.

4	To customize the hue, lightness, or saturation of colors, choose Define.

5	Choose Save As to save the customized color palette.

6	Type the name of the new palette and choose Save.

Choose from the following Color Attributes options for more information:

Define Color Palette

Retrieve Color Palette

Save Color Palette

See Also

Fill Attributes

Line Attributes

Palettes

Text Attributes


Define Color Palette

Attributes, Color, Define

Use Define Color Palette to customize the colors for your drawings or slide shows.

To define a color,

1	Choose Color from the Attributes menu, then choose Define.

2	Select a color from the color palette.

3	Select the Selection Option you want to use and drag to select a block of colors.

4	Choose the Color Model you want from the Select Model pop-up list and specify the new values in the Color Model text boxes.

5	Choose OK.

6	Choose Save As to save the colors to a file.

Choose from the following Define Color Palette options for more information:

Color Model

Selection Options

Copy and Paste Colors

See Also

Color Attributes

Palettes

Retrieve Color Palette

Save Color Palette


 Hint

The color appears in the Current Color box, on the color wheel, on the intensity bar, and in the color palette.


 Hint

To move the selected color or colors to another spot on the palette, choose Copy, select the new location, and choose Paste.

To change all the colors in the selected block at once, choose Blend, Complement, or Rainbow.


Color Model

Attributes, Color, Define, Color Model

Use a Color Model to set the hue, lightness, and saturation of a color.

To use a color model,

1	Choose Color from the Attributes menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose the Color Model you want to use from the Select Model pop-up list.

3	Specify the values you want in the Color Model text boxes.

4	Choose OK.

5	Choose Save As to save the color palette to a file.

See Also

Color Attributes

Copy and Paste Colors

Palettes

Retrieve Color Palette

Save Color Palette

Selection Options


 Hint

RGB is commonly used for on-screen slide shows.  HLS is used to determine the hue, lightness or saturation of a color.  CMYK is used when slides or color copies need to be made.


 Hint

Changes in color show in the Current Color box, intensity bar, color palette, and color wheel.  If you define a color that may be difficult to duplicate later, record the numbers from the text boxes for future reference or save the color palette.


Selection Options

Attributes, Color, Define, Selection Options

Use the Selection Options to select the block of colors you want to customize.

To use the selection options,

1	Choose Color from the Attributes menu, then choose Define.

2	Select Stream Mode.

or... Select Block Mode.

3	Highlight a block of colors from the color palette.

4	Choose Blend, Rainbow or Complement then copy and paste colors to the color palette using the Copy and Paste buttons.

5	Choose OK.

6	Choose Save As to save the colors to a file.

See Also

Color Attributes

Color Model

Copy and Paste Colors

Define Color Palette

Retrieve Color Palette

Save Color Palette


Copy and Paste Colors

Attributes, Color, Define, Copy and Paste

Use Copy and Paste to copy and paste colors on the color palette.  You can modify the copied color without changing the original color.

To copy and paste colors,

1	Choose Color from the Attributes menu, then choose Define.

2	Select the color or block of colors you want to customize.

3	Choose Copy to copy the colors to the Clipboard.

4	Click the the palette section where you want to place the colors.

5	Choose Paste.

6	Customize your colors by using the Color Models and Selection Options.

7	Choose OK.

8	Choose Save As to save the color palette to a file.

See Also

Color Attributes

Color Model

Define Color Palette

Retrieve Color Palette

Save Color Palette

Selection Options


 Hint

If you want to keep a copy of the original colors intact, you will need to copy and paste them to a new location on your palette before you modify them.


Save Color Palette

Attributes, Color, Save Color Palette

Use Save Color Palette to save palettes you have customized.

To save color palettes,

1	Choose Color from the Attributes menu.

2	Define the colors you want to save in a new color palette.

3	Choose Save As.

4	Type the filename you want in the Save As text box.

5	Choose Save.

See Also

Color Attributes

Define Color Palette

Quick List

Retrieve Color Palette


 Hint

The name of the current directory appears next to Current Dir.  If you want to change directories, select one from the Directories list box, or select the QuickList check box, or type the full pathname in the Filename text box.


Retrieve Color Palette

Attributes, Color, Retrieve

Use Retrieve Color Palette to retrieve a color palette that has already been defined.

To retrieve a defined color palette,

1	Choose Color from the Attributes menu, then choose Retrieve.

2	Type the color palette filename in the Filename text box.

or... Select the file from the Files list box.

or... Click inside the Files list box and begin typing the first few letters of the filename.

3	Choose Open, then choose OK.

See Also

Color Attributes

Define Color Palette

Quick List

Save Color Palette


 Hint

The Name Search text box appears above the Files list box, indicating the filename.


Effects

Arrange, Effects

Use Effects to change the appearance of objects or text in your drawings or slide shows.

Blend

Trace Bitmap

Explode Chart

Contour Text

Straighten Text


Blend

Arrange, Effects, Blend

Use Blend to combine the shapes, sizes, and colors of two objects.

You must have only two objects selected to blend.

To blend two objects,

1	Draw the two objects you want to blend.

2	Select both of the objects.

3	Choose Effects from the Arrange menu, then choose Blend.

4	Specify the number of steps you want between the objects.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Color Attributes

Draw


Trace Bitmap

Arrange, Effects, Trace Bitmap

Use Trace Bitmap to convert a bitmap image into a vector image.  Vector images print more clearly than bitmap images.

When a bitmap is traced, it is no longer a bitmap and cannot be edited using the Bitmap Editor.  Therefore, you may want to save your bitmap before you trace it.  You can return it to a bitmap by saving it in a bitmap format.

To convert a bitmap into a vector image,

1	Insert or create the bitmap image you want to trace and select it.

2	Choose Effects from the Arrange menu, then choose Trace Bitmap.

See Also

Bitmap Editor

Group

Insert File

Save in Bitmap Format


 Hint

You must be in the drawing window to select the bitmap image.


 Hint

WP Presentations converts the bitmap into a series of vector objects with editing points around each object.  To deselect the objects, click anywhere outside the objects in the drawing window.


Explode Chart

Arrange, Effects, Explode Chart

Use Explode Chart to convert a chart into a series of vector images.

When you explode a chart, you can no longer edit the data in that chart using the Chart Editor.  Therefore, you may want to save the original chart before using the Explode Chart feature.

To explode a portion of a chart,

1	Import or create the chart you want to convert into a drawing object, then select it.

2	Choose Effects from the Arrange menu, then choose Explode Chart.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart

Chart Edit Menu

Group

Pie Chart Explode Slice


 Hint

You must be in the drawing window to select the chart.


 Hint

The exploded chart reappears as a series of vector objects with editing points around each object.


Contour Text

Arrange, Effects, Contour Text

Use Contour Text to shape text to the form of a drawn object.

To contour your text,

1	Select an existing object and text by holding down the Ctrl key to select both at once.

2	Choose Effects from the Arrange menu, then choose Contour Text.

3	Choose an option from the Position pop-up list to position the contoured text in relation to the object.

4	Deselect Display Text Only to keep the object and text on screen.

See Also

Straighten Text

Text Attributes

Text Menu


Straighten Text

Arrange, Effects, Straighten Text

Use Straighten Text to straighten text contoured around a drawing object and restore the object.

To straighten text,

1	Select the text you want to straighten.

2	Choose Effects from the Arrange menu, then choose Straighten Text.

See Also

Contour Text

Text Attributes

Text Menu


Fill Attributes

Attributes, Fill

Draw, Bitmap, Attributes, Fill

Use Fill Attributes to choose colors and patterns for objects and bitmap images.

To set fill attributes,

1	Choose Fill from the Attributes menu.

2	Choose an option from the Apply To pop-up list.

3	Select a Fill Type.

4	Select the gradient or pattern options you want.

5	Choose Line to set Line Attributes.

6	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Fill Attributes options for more information:

Pattern

Gradient

See Also

Color Attributes

Line Attributes

Shadow Attributes

Text Attributes


 Hint

Pattern fills objects with a solid color or a pattern from the pattern palette.  Gradient fills objects with a blend of two colors.  None disables Fill and draws objects as outlines only.


 Hint

If you have selected an item, only that item will be affected.  If no item is selected, the new Fill Attributes will apply to all new items until you change them or exit the program.


Fill Attributes Pattern

Attributes, Fill, Pattern

Draw, Bitmap, Attributes, Fill, Pattern

Use Pattern to choose solid colors or patterns for objects and bitmap images.

To fill an object with a solid color or pattern,

1	Choose Fill from the Attributes menu.

2	Select Pattern as the Fill Type.

3	Choose a Fill Pattern from the Pattern palette.

4	Select a Foreground and a Background Color from the color palettes.

5	Choose a Fill Method and Transparency option from the pop-up lists.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Fill Attributes

Fill Attributes Gradient


Fill Attributes Gradient

Attributes, Fill, Gradient

Draw, Bitmap, Attributes, Fill, Gradient

Use Gradient to choose gradient colors, fill methods, angles and types for objects and bitmap images.

To fill an object with a gradient color,

1	Choose Fill from the Attributes menu.

2	Select Gradient as the Fill Type.

3	Select a Center Color and an Outer Color from the color palettes.

4	Choose a Fill Method and Type from the pop-up lists, then specify the Angle of the colors.

5	Choose offset options in the Center Color Position group box to adjust the center of the gradient.

6	Select Auto-Step Blending or specify the amount of Fixed Blending you want.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Fill Attributes

Fill Attributes Pattern


 Hint

X Offset adjusts the horizontal position and Y Offset adjusts the vertical position.


Line Attributes

Attributes, Line

Draw, Bitmap, Attributes, Line

Use Line Attributes to choose the style, pattern, color, and width of the foreground or background lines on your objects.

To use Line Attributes,

1	Choose Line from the Attributes menu.

2	Choose an option from the Apply To pop-up list.

3	Select No Line if you want no lines to appear.

4	Select a Foreground and a Background color from the color palettes.

5	Specify the line width, or click the icon to the right and select a line width.

6	Select the Pattern and Style you want to use.

7	Choose an option from the Joins pop-up list to determine angle appearance.

8	Choose an option from the Ends pop-up list.

9	Choose an option from the Arrowhead pop-up list.

10	Choose Fill, make the Fill Attribute changes you want, then choose OK.

11	Choose OK.

See Also

Color Attributes

Fill Attributes

Shadow Attributes

Text Attributes


 Hint

A Background Color only appears when you select a pattern.


 Hint

Flat ends stop at line handles and the line does not get longer as it thickens.  Round and Square ends stretch beyond the handles and allow the line to lengthen as it thickens.


 Hint

If you have selected a line, only that line will be affected.  If no line is selected, the new Line Attributes will apply to all new lines until you change them or exit the program.


Arrange Menu

Use options on the Arrange menu to position and manipulate graphics and text.

Effects

Front

Back

Forward One

Backward One

Group

Ungroup

Combine

Separate

Flip Left/Right

Flip Top/Bottom

Align

Space Evenly


Front

Arrange, Front

Use Front to move items to the front of your drawing.

To place items in front,

1	Select the items you want to place in front.

2	Choose Front from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Back

Backward One

Forward One


 Hint

Click once outside the items to deselect them.


Back

Arrange, Back

Use Back to move items to the back of your drawing.

To place items in back,

1	Select the items you want to place in back.

2	Choose Back from the Arrange menu to move the items to the back of the drawing.

See Also

Front

Backward One

Forward One


Forward One

Arrange, Forward One

Use Forward One to move items forward by one position.

To move an item forward one position,

1	Select the items you want to move forward.

2	Choose Forward One from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Back

Backward One

Front


Backward One

Arrange, Backward One

Use Backward One to move items backward by one position.

To place items backward one position,

1	Select the items you want to move backward by one position.

2	Choose Backward One from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Front

Back

Forward One


Group

Arrange, Group

Use Group to manipulate two or more items as one item.  Group is used in complex drawings so a group of items will retain their original arrangement and proportions to each other when you move, size, rotate, or stretch them.

You cannot group bitmap images, text, or charts.

To group items,

1	Select each item that will be in the group.

2	Choose Group from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Combine

Separate

Ungroup


 Hint

For example, by grouping all of the items that comprise a house--such as the chimney, windows, roof, etc.--you could move the house as one item.


Ungroup

Arrange, Ungroup

Use Ungroup to break a grouped image into individual items.

To ungroup items,

1	Select the item you want to ungroup.

2	Choose Ungroup from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Combine

Group

Separate


Combine

Arrange, Combine

Use Combine to create a single item from two or more drawing items.  The fill colors and patterns of the bottom object are assigned to the combined item and overlapping areas become transparent.

You cannot combine bitmap images, text, or charts.

To combine multiple items into one,

1	Draw the first item.

2	Draw the second item inside the background item with the color or pattern you want.

or... Draw subsequent items that you want to combine.

3	Select all of the drawn items.

4	Choose Combine from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Group

Separate

Ungroup


 Hint

For example, you could draw a small rectangle in the center of a large rectangle to create a picture frame.


Separate

Arrange, Separate

Use Separate to return a combined item to the original items.  The original colors and patterns of the items will be restored.

To separate combined items,

1	Select the combined item you want to separate.

2	Choose Separate from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Combine

Group

Ungroup


Flip Left/Right

Arrange, Flip Left/Right

Use Flip Left/Right to horizontally flip an item.

To flip an item,

1	Select the item you want to flip.

2	Choose Flip Left/Right from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Flip Top/Bottom


Flip Top/Bottom

Arrange, Flip Top/Bottom

Use Flip Top/Bottom to vertically flip an item.

To flip an item,

1	Select the item you want to flip.

2	Choose Flip Top/Bottom from the Arrange menu.

See Also

Flip Left/Right


Shadow Attributes

Attributes, Shadow

Use Shadow Attributes to create and modify shadow characteristics.

To create and modify shadow characteristics,

1	Select the object you want to shadow.

or... If you want the shadow attributes to apply to all objects you draw, go to step 2 without selecting an object.

2	Choose Shadow from the Attributes menu.

3	Select Shadow On.

4	Select Transparency On to change the shadow's density.

5	Select a color from the Shadow Color palette.

6	Specify the X and Y Offset values to move the shadow around the object.

or... Use the scroll bars to move the shadow around the object.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Color Attributes

Fill Attributes

Line Attributes

Text Attributes


Space Evenly

Arrange, Space Evenly

Use Space Evenly when you want equal spacing between three or more items.

To space objects evenly,

1	Select the items that you want to space.

2	Choose Space Evenly from the Arrange menu, then choose Left/Right for horizontal spacing.

or... Choose Top/Bottom for vertical spacing.

See Also

Align

Center Both

Center Left/Right

Center Top/Bottom


 Hint

The objects are proportionally spaced.  Space Evenly does not move overlapping objects apart.  If any objects overlapped before, all objects will overlap by the same amount.

Click once outside the objects to deselect them.


Text Attributes

Attributes, Text

Draw, Bitmap, Attributes, Text

Use Text Attributes to create or change the font, style, color, and appearance of the text in your drawings or slide shows.

To create or change text appearance in your document,

1	Choose Text from the Attributes menu.

2	Select Pattern, Gradient, or None.

3	Select an outline color from the color palette.

4	Specify the line width, or click the icon to the right and select a line width.

5	Make the gradient or pattern changes you want.

6	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Text Attributes options for more information:

Pattern

Gradient

See Also

Color Attributes

Fill Attributes

Line Attributes

Shadow Attributes


 Hint

Pattern fills letters with a solid color or pattern.  Gradient fills letters with a blend of two colors.  None disables Fill and text appears as outlines only.


 Hint

If you have selected text, only that text will be affected.  If no text is selected, the new Text Attributes will apply to all new text until you change them or exit the program.


Text Attributes Pattern

Attributes, Text, Pattern

Use Pattern to choose solid colors or patterns to place inside text letters.

To fill letters with a solid color or pattern,

1	Choose Text from the Attributes menu.

2	Select Pattern.

3	Choose a Pattern from the Pattern palette.

5	Select a Foreground Color and a Background Color from the color palettes.

6	Select an outline color from the color palette.

7	Specify the line width, or click the icon to the right and select a line width.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Text Attributes

Text Attributes Gradient


Text Attributes Gradient

Attributes, Text, Gradient

Use Gradient to choose gradient colors, angles, and types to place inside text letters.

To fill a letter with a gradient color,

1	Choose Text from the Attributes menu.

2	Select Gradient.

3	Select a Center Color and an Outer Color from the color palettes.

4	Select an outline color from the color palette.

5	Specify the line width, or click the icon to the right and select a line width.

6	Choose a Type from the Type pop-up list, then specify the Angle Fill for the colors.

7	Choose the offset options in the Center Color Position group box to adjust the center of the gradient.

8	Select Auto Step Blending or specify the amount of Fixed Blending you want.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Text Attributes

Text Attributes Pattern


Attributes Menu

Use the options on the Attributes menu to modify the color, style, line width, and patterns of text, objects, or bitmap images.

Color

Line

Fill

Text

Shadow

Outline

Silhouette

Black and White

Invert

Get Attributes

Apply Attributes

See Also

Bitmap Attributes Menu


Outline

Attributes, Outline

Use Outline to change the fill color of one or more objects to the page color and leave the outline.

To make objects outlines,

1	Select the objects you want to convert to an outline.

2	Choose Outline from the Attributes menu.

See Also

Black and White

Invert

Silhouette


 Hint

The fill color or pattern takes on the background page color on a solid page and the center color on a gradient page, leaving a black outline of the object.

Click once outside the objects to deselect them.


Silhouette

Attributes, Silhouette

Use Silhouette to change the color of filled objects to black.

To create silhouettes,

1	Select the objects you want to see as a silhouette.

2	Choose Silhouette from the Attributes menu.

See Also

Black and White

Invert

Outline


Black and White

Attributes, Black and White

Use Black and White to take the fill color out of an object and make the outline black and the interior white.  If an object has a black fill, it will remain black.

To make an object black and white,

1	Select the objects for which the color will be changed to white.

2	Choose Black and White from the Attributes menu.

See Also

Invert

Outline

Silhouette


Invert

Attributes, Invert

Use Invert to change the color of an object to its complementary color.

To change an object's color to its complement,

1	Select the objects for which you want to change the color.

2	Choose Invert from the Attributes menu.

See Also

Black and White

Outline

Silhouette


Get and Apply Attributes

Attributes, Get Attributes and Apply Attributes

Use Get Attributes and Apply Attributes to copy the attributes from objects or text and apply them to other objects or text.

To get attributes and apply them to other objects,

1	Select the object or text with the attributes you want to transfer.

2	Choose Get Attributes from the Attributes menu.

3	Select Graphics Only to transfer attributes from an object, Text Only to transfer attributes from text, or Graphics and Text to transfer attributes from both, then choose OK.

4	Select the object or text that will receive the attributes.

5	Choose Apply Attributes from the Attributes menu.

See Also

Color Attributes

Fill Attributes

Line Attributes

Shadow Attributes

Text Attributes


Bitmap Attributes Menu

Draw, Bitmap, Attributes

Use the options on the Bitmap Attributes menu to control the color, line and fill patterns, text, and brush style for a bitmap image.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

Color

Line

Fill

Text

Brush


Bitmap Edit Menu

Use the options on the Bitmap Edit menu in the Bitmap Editor to modify a bitmap image.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

Undo

Erase

Cut

Copy

Paste

Select Area


Erase

Draw, Bitmap, Edit, Erase

Use Erase to delete a selected area in a bitmap image.

To erase an area in a bitmap,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, select the bitmap area you want to erase, then choose Erase from the Edit menu.

See Also

Bitmap Tool Palette

Edit a Bitmap

Eraser

Select Area

Undo


Select Area

Draw, Bitmap, Edit, Select Area

Use Select Area to define the area of the bitmap you want to cut, copy, or erase.

To select an area in a bitmap,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, click [image] from the bitmap tool palette.  (You can also choose Select Area from the Edit menu.)

3	Drag the pointer to designate the area you want to select.

4	Choose a tool or use a feature to affect the selected area.

See Also

Bitmap Tool Palette

Copy

Cut

Erase


Edit a Bitmap

You can edit an existing bitmap image in the Bitmap Editor.

To edit an existing bitmap,

1	Select the bitmap image, then double-click it.

or... Place the pointer on the bitmap image, press the right mouse button, then choose Edit Bitmap.

or... Select the  bitmap image, then choose Edit Bitmap from the Edit menu.

The Bitmap Editor opens, and you can edit the bitmap using bitmap tools.

2	Choose Return from the Bitmap File menu to finish.

or... Choose the Return button.

See Also

Bitmap Edit Menu

Bitmap Tool Palette

Edit


Edit a Chart

You can edit an existing chart in the Chart Editor.

To edit an existing chart,

1	Select the chart, then double-click it.

or... Place the pointer on the chart, press the right mouse button, then choose Edit Chart.

or... Select the chart, then choose Edit Chart from the Edit menu.

The Chart Editor opens, and you can edit the chart.

2	Choose Return from the Chart File menu to finish.

or... Choose the Return button.

See Also

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Edit


Edit a Template

Edit, Templates, Template

You can edit an existing template in the Template Editor.

To edit a template,

1	Choose Master Gallery from the Slide menu.

2	Select the master template you want to edit, then choose Retrieve.

3	Choose Templates from the Edit menu, then choose OK to open the Template Editor.

4	Select the template you want to edit using the Template Pop-up List.

5	Edit your template.

6	Choose Save As from the File menu while still in the master template window.  Specify a filename with a .MST extension, then choose Close to save the new master template.

7	Click Return to Slide Show [image] to close the Template Editor and return to your slide show.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the Edit menu.)

See Also

Add Template

Delete Template

Link Templates

Master Gallery

Name Template

Template Pop-up List

Templates


 Hint

The edited template can be selected and applied like other templates in the Template Pop-up List.


Edit a Figure

You can edit a figure in the Figure Editor.

To edit a figure,

1	Select the figure, then double-click it.

or... Place the pointer on the figure, press the right mouse button, then choose Edit Figure.

or... Select the figure, then choose Edit Figure from the Edit menu.

The figure is redrawn, and you can select and modify any part of it.

To exit the Figure Editor,

1	Double-click outside the figure.

or... Press the right mouse button, then choose Exit Figure Edit.

See Also

Edit

Figure


Edit Text

You can edit text in the Text Editor.

To edit text,

1	Select the text, then double-click it.

or... Place the pointer on the text, press the right mouse button, then choose Edit Text.

or... Select the text, then choose Edit Text from the Edit menu.

The Text Editor opens, and you can select and modify any part of the text.

To exit the Text Editor,

1	Click outside the text area or text line.

or... Press the right mouse button, then choose Exit Text Editor.

See Also

Edit

Text


Edit an Object

You can change the shape and size of an object after you select it by moving its handles.

To edit an object,

1	Select the object you want to edit, then choose Edit Points from the Edit menu.

or... Place the pointer on the object, press the right mouse button, then choose Edit Points.

2	Select an editing handle and drag it to a new position.

3	Press the right mouse button to display the Pop-up Menu, then choose the editing options you want:

Add

Delete

Open

Close

To Curve

To Line

Smooth

Symmetric

See Also

Edit


Add

Inserts a new point between the selected handle and the next handle.


Delete

Removes the selected handle.


Open

Removes the last segment drawn to create an open object.


Close

Connects an object between its first and last handle.


To Curve

Creates a Bézier curve at the selected handle.


To Line

Replaces the curve with two lines.


Smooth

Softens a Bézier curve.


Symmetric

Evens the length of the direction lines on a Bézier curve.


Bitmap File Menu

Draw, Bitmap, File

Use the options on the Bitmap File menu in the Bitmap Editor to clear, cancel, or return a bitmap image to the drawing window.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

Clear

Cancel

Return


Cancel

Draw, Bitmap, File, Cancel

Draw, Chart, File, Cancel

Use Cancel to exit the Bitmap Editor or Chart Editor without saving your bitmap image or chart.

To cancel a bitmap drawing or chart,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

or... Click here for instructions on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	Choose Cancel from the File menu.  (You can also choose the Cancel button at the bottom left of your screen.)

3	Choose Yes.

See Also

Bitmap Clear

Chart Clear

Return


Return

Draw, Bitmap, File, Return

Draw, Chart, File, Return

Use Return to bring your bitmap image or chart into the drawing window.

To bring a bitmap image or chart into the drawing window,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, choose Return from the File menu.  (You can also choose the Return button at the bottom left of your screen.)

See Also

Bitmap Clear

Cancel

Chart Clear


Bitmap Clear

Draw, Bitmap, File, Clear

Use Clear to erase a bitmap without exiting the Bitmap Editor.

To clear a bitmap,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, choose Clear from the File menu.

3	Choose Yes in the Clear Bitmap dialog box.

See Also

Cancel

Return


Bitmap View Menu

Draw, Bitmap, View

Use the options on the Bitmap View menu in the Bitmap Editor to change what you see in the bitmap window.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

Reveal Codes

Palettes

Button Bar

Button Bar Setup

Zoom


Bitmap Zoom

Draw, Bitmap, View, Zoom

Use Zoom to magnify a bitmap image and edit it one pixel at a time.

To magnify a bitmap image,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, click [image] from the Bitmap tool palette.  (You can also choose Zoom from the View menu.)

3	Drag the rectangle in the Full Bitmap or Actual Size areas to define the area you want to magnify.

To use the Pixel Editor,

1	Click [image] from the Bitmap tool palette.  (You can also choose Paint Brush from the Paint menu.)

2	Choose a color from the color palette.

3	Click a pixel in the Pixel Editor to change it to the color you just selected.

To exit the Pixel Editor,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Zoom again from the View menu.)

See Also

Bitmap

Bitmap Tool Palette


 Hint

The screen is divided into three areas:  the Full Bitmap area on the top left, the Actual Size area on the bottom left, and the Pixel Editor area on the right.


 Hint

You can choose other tools to get different effects.  For example, [image] lets you fill an area with the same color.


Chart Menu

Draw, Chart, Chart

Use the options on the Chart menu to choose a chart type. Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

Gallery

Bullet

Organization

Table

Pie

Bar

Line

Area

Surface

Scatter

Hi-Lo

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu

Chart File Menu

Chart Options Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu


Chart Tool Palette

Use the Chart Tool Palette to choose options for specific charts.  You can drag the title bar to position the palette on the screen.  The Chart Tool Palette is active only when you are in the Chart Editor.

To learn more about the tool palette,

1	Place the pointer on the tool palette.

2	Click to open a pop-up definition on how to use that particular tool.

3	Click anywhere in the graphic to close the pop-up.

See Also

Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Organization Chart Tool Palette

Pie Chart Tool Palette

Surface Chart Tool Palette

Table Tool Palette

Tool Palette


Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Use the Bullet Chart Tool Palette to choose options for a bullet chart.  The Bullet Chart Tool Palette appears only when you are creating or editing a bullet chart.  You can drag the title bar to position the palette on the screen.

To learn more about the tool palette,

1	Place the pointer on the tool palette.

2	Click to open a pop-up definition on how to use that particular tool.

3	Click anywhere in the graphic to close the pop-up.

See Also

Chart Tool Palette

Organization Chart Tool Palette

Pie Chart Tool Palette

Surface Chart Tool Palette

Table Tool Palette

Tool Palette


Organization Chart Tool Palette

Use the Organization Chart Tool Palette to choose options for organization charts.  The Organization Chart Tool Palette appears only when you are creating or editing an organization chart.  You can drag the title bar to position the palette on the screen.

To learn more about the tool palette,

1	Place the pointer on the tool palette.

2	Click to open a pop-up definition on how to use that particular tool.

3	Click anywhere in the graphic to close the pop-up.

See Also

Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Chart Tool Palette

Pie Chart Tool Palette

Surface Chart Tool Palette

Table Tool Palette

Tool Palette


Pie Chart Tool Palette

Use the Pie Chart Tool Palette to choose options for pie charts.  The Pie Chart Tool Palette appears only when you are creating or editing a pie chart.  You can drag the  title bar to position the palette on the screen.

To learn more about the tool palette,

1	Place the pointer on the tool palette.

2	Click to open a pop-up definition on how to use that particular tool.

3	Click anywhere in the graphic to close the pop-up.

See Also

Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Chart Tool Palette

Organization Chart Tool Palette

Surface Chart Tool Palette

Table Tool Palette

Tool Palette


Table Tool Palette

Use the Table Tool Palette to choose options for tables.  The Table Tool Palette appears only when you are creating or editing a table.  You can drag the title bar to position the palette on the screen.

To learn more about the tool palette,

1	Place the pointer on the tool palette.

2	Click to open a pop-up definition on how to use that particular tool.

3	Click anywhere in the graphic to close the pop-up.

See Also

Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Chart Tool Palette

Organization Chart Tool Palette

Pie Chart Tool Palette

Surface Chart Tool Palette

Tool Palette


Surface Chart Tool Palette

Use the Surface Chart Tool Palette to choose options for surface charts.  The Surface Chart Tool Palette appears only when you are creating or editing a surface chart.  You can drag the title bar to position the palette on the screen.

To learn more about the tool palette,

1	Place the pointer on the tool palette.

2	Click to open a pop-up definition on how to use that particular tool.

3	Click anywhere in the graphic to close the pop-up.

See Also

Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Chart Tool Palette

Organization Chart Tool Palette

Pie Chart Tool Palette

Table Tool Palette

Tool Palette


Create a Chart

Draw, Chart, Create Chart

Use Create Chart to choose the type of chart you want to create and to open the Chart Editor.

To create a chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select the chart type you want.

or... Choose Gallery to see examples of charts.

4	Choose OK.

You are now in the Chart Editor.

See Also

Chart Gallery

Chart Menu

Create or Edit a Worksheet

Edit a Chart


Chart Gallery

Draw, Chart, Gallery

Use Gallery to display templates of the kinds of charts you can create.  You can open, modify, and save any of these sample charts.

To retrieve a chart from the Chart Gallery and enter the Chart Editor,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Choose Gallery.

4	Select a chart category, then choose Chart Styles to display different styles for the chart type you have chosen.

5	Select the chart template you want, then choose OK.

To retrieve a chart from the Chart Gallery while in the Chart Editor,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Gallery from the Chart menu.)

2	Follow steps 4 and 5 above.

See Also

Gallery Options

Tool Palette


 Hint

To return to the category list, choose Chart Types.


 Hint

The Chart Gallery displays the Chart Styles for the current chart type.


 Bullet Chart

Draw, Chart, Bullet Chart

Use Bullet Chart to create a text chart displaying bulleted text items as a list.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create a bullet chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Bullet Chart, then choose OK.

4	Type your text in the Text Chart Outliner.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Bullet Chart Options Menu

Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Chart Edit Menu

Chart File Menu

Chart View Menu

Chart Text Menu


 Hint

You can choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample text from the outline, or you can change each line.

To insert a new line, press Enter.  To move an item to the right, press Tab.  To move an item to the left, press Shift+Tab.


 Organization Chart

Draw, Chart, Org Chart

Use Organization Chart to create a text chart showing an organization’s structure or relationships of people and positions.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create an organization chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Organization, then choose OK.

4	Type your organization data in the Text Chart Outliner.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Edit Menu

Chart File Menu

Chart Text Menu

Chart View Menu

Organization Chart Options Menu

Organization Chart Tool Palette


 Hint

You can choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample text from the organization chart, or you can change each line.

To insert a same-level position in the chart, press Enter and type the name.  To create a subordinate position, press Tab to align the position and type the name.  To return to the previous level, press Shift+Tab.


 Table

Draw, Chart, Table

Use Table to display data in rows and columns.  You can display a table below a chart by using the display table option.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create a table,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Table, then choose OK.

4	Choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample data, then type your data in the Worksheet window.

or... Change the data in each cell by selecting the cell and typing new data.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Export from the File menu to save the table data without creating a chart in the current document.

or... Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart File Menu

Chart Import (Worksheet)

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart Table/Surface Options

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu


 Pie Chart

Draw, Chart, Pie

Use Pie Chart to create pie-shaped data charts.  Each pie slice represents a data cell in your Worksheet.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create a pie chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Pie, then choose OK.

4	Choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample data, then type your data in the Worksheet window.

or... Change the data in each cell by selecting the cell and typing new data.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Export from the File menu to save the Worksheet data without creating a chart in the current document.

or... Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart File Menu

Chart View Menu

Pie Chart Layout

Pie Chart Pie Options

Pie Chart Tool Palette


 Hint

The data for the first pie chart goes under Pie 1.  You can create up to 9 pie charts in the same Worksheet.


 Bar Chart

Draw, Chart, Bar

Use Bar Chart to create a data chart with vertical or horizontal bars that represent the data in your Worksheet.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create a bar chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Bar, then choose OK.

4	Choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample data, then type your data in the Worksheet window.

or... Change the data in each cell by selecting the cell and typing the new data.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Export from the File menu to save the Worksheet data without creating a chart in the current document.

or... Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart File Menu

Chart Options Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu


 Line Chart

Draw, Chart, Line

Use Line Chart to create a data chart with straight lines to connect graph points from your Worksheet data.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create a line chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Line, then choose OK.

4	Choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample data, then type your data in the Worksheet window.

or... Change the data in each cell by selecting the cell and typing the new data.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Export from the File menu to save the Worksheet data without creating a chart in the current document.

or... Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart File Menu

Chart Options Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu


 Area Chart

Draw, Chart, Area

Use Area Chart to create a data chart with continuous solid areas that measure the data in your Worksheet.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create an area chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Area, then choose OK.

4	Choose Clear from the File menu to remove all the sample data, then type your data in the Worksheet window.

or... Change the data in each cell by selecting the cell and typing the new data.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Export from the File menu to save the Worksheet data without creating a chart in the current document.

or... Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart File Menu

Chart Options Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu


 Surface Chart

Draw, Chart, Surface

Use Surface Chart to create a data chart with a solid area that bulges and dips to measure your Worksheet data.  The color of the solid area changes as the surface rises and falls.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create a surface chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Surface, then choose OK.

4	Choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample data, then type your data in the Worksheet window.

or... Change the data in each cell by selecting the cell and typing the new data.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Export from the File menu to save the Worksheet data without creating a chart in the current document.

or... Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart File Menu

Chart Options Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu


 Scatter Chart

Draw, Chart, Scatter

Use Scatter Chart to create a data chart that displays data as intersecting points on a grid.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create a scatter chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Scatter, then choose OK.

4	Choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample data, then type your data in the Worksheet window.

or... Change the data in each cell by selecting the cell and typing the new data.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Export from the File menu to save the Worksheet data without creating a chart in the current document.

or... Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart File Menu

Chart Options Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu


 Hi-Lo Chart

Draw, Chart, Hi-Lo

Use Hi-Lo Chart to create a data chart that measures high, low, opening, and closing values.  A vertical line or bar connects high and low values for the time period; horizontal marks or bars show opening and closing values.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create a Hi-Lo chart,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Select Hi-Lo, then choose OK.

4	Choose Clear from the File menu to remove the sample data, then type your data in the Worksheet window.

or... Change the data in each cell by selecting the cell and typing the new data.

5	Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to view your changes.

6	Choose Export from the File menu to save the Worksheet data without creating a chart in the current document.

or... Choose Return from the File menu or choose the Return button to insert the chart into the current document.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart File Menu

Chart Options Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu


 Hint

Type a new label in every fourth column.  For each label, type four data values in each row, representing the high, low, opening, and closing values.


Create a Worksheet

Draw, Chart

A Worksheet appears at the top of the chart window when you open or create a data chart.  The data you enter in the Worksheet can be displayed in the chart.

You must be in the Chart Editor to use this feature.

To create  a chart in the Chart Editor,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Chart from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to create a chart that will fill the window.

or... Drag to define a chart area.

3	Choose Return from the Chart File menu when you have finished editing.

To learn more about the Worksheet,

1	Click on any part of the sample Worksheet below for help with that part:

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Open (Worksheet)

Chart Options Menu

Chart Tool Palette

Data Entry

Moving to a Cell


Moving to a Cell

Draw, Chart

You will need to move from cell to cell to enter chart data in the Worksheet.

To move to a cell,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, click on the desired cell in the Worksheet.

or... Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired cell.

or... Choose Go To Cell from the Edit menu, enter the coordinates of the cell you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Data Entry

Go To Cell


Data Entry

Draw, Chart

You need to enter data in the Worksheet to produce a data chart.

To enter or replace data in the current cell,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell by clicking it or using the arrow keys.

3	Type the new data, replacing any previous data in the cell.

or... Paste data that has been copied to the Clipboard.

4	Click on a different place in the Worksheet or press Enter to finish updating the cell.

To edit data in the current cell,

1	Highlight the cell, then press Enter or double-click the cell.

or... Choose Edit Cell from the Edit menu.

2	Edit the value in the Cell text box.

3	Choose OK to update the cell.

To remove data from the current cell,

1	Press Backspace.

2	Choose OK to remove the data.

See Also

Chart Copy

Chart Paste

Moving to a Cell


 Hint

The cell must have numeric data in order to be plotted in a data chart (unless the cell is a Label or a Legend).


 Hint

Numeric data is right-justified in the cell.  Text or date entries are left-justified.


Inactive cell

Any data entered in this cell (directly to the right of Labels) cannot be displayed in the chart.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column A)

The current value in this cell is 90.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column B)

The current value in this cell is 50.


Data entry cell (Row 1, Column C)

The current value in this cell is 65.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column A)

The current value in this cell is 50.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column B)

The current value in this cell is 40.


Data entry cell (Row 2, Column C)

There is no current value in this cell.


Legend

Clicking this cell selects all Legend names (in the Legend column) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Labels

Clicking this cell selects all Label names (in the Labels row) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Select all

Clicking this cell selects the entire Worksheet for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Row 1

Clicking this cell selects the Row 1 Legend and all Row 1 data entry cells (90, 50, and 65 in this sample chart) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.  This is called a series.


Row 2

Clicking this cell selects the Row 2 Legend and all Row 2 data entry cells (50, 40, and empty in this sample chart) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.  This is called a series.


Column A

Clicking this cell selects the Column A Label and all Column A data entry cells (90 and 50) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Column B

Clicking this cell selects the Column B Label and all Column B data entry cells (50 and 40) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Column C

Clicking this cell selects the Column C Label and all Column C data entry cells (65 and empty) for cutting, copying, pasting, and so on.


Legend cell (Row 1)

This cell contains the Legend name for Row 1.  The Legend appears on the graph only when you choose Legend from the Options menu and select Display Legend.


Legend cell (Row 2)

This cell contains the Legend name for Row 2.  The Legend appears on the graph only when you choose Legend from the Options menu and select Display Legend.


Label cell (Column A)

This cell contains the Label name for Column A.  This label appears as the first item on the X-axis of the graph.


Label cell (Column B)

This cell contains the Legend name for Column B.  This label appears as the second item on the X-axis of the graph.


Label cell (Column C)

This cell contains the Legend name for Column C.  This label appears as the third item on the X-axis of the graph.


Chart Data Menu

Draw, Chart, Data

Use the options on the Chart Data menu to control how data is entered and displayed in the Worksheet.  The Data menu is only available when you are working on data charts, not on text charts.  Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

Format

Column Width

Statistics

Formulas

Recalculate

Fill

Sort

Include Row/Col

Exclude Row/Col


Chart Data Fill

Draw, Chart, Data, Fill

Use Fill in a Worksheet to fill selected cells with linear, growth, or date data series.

To fill cells with a data series,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select two or more Worksheet cells.

3	Choose Fill from the Data menu.

4	Select Rows to insert the data series from left to right, or Columns to insert the data from top to bottom.

5	Select a Fill Type.

6	Choose a date/time interval from the Date pop-up list.

7	Specify the starting value (number or date) for the series in the Start text box, then specify a number to indicate the rate of increase for the series in the Step text box.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Sort


 Hint

These options apply to the Worksheet cells you selected, including multiple columns and rows.


 Hint

This can be a negative number if you want a descending series.


Chart Data Sort

Draw, Chart, Data, Sort

Use Sort to sort rows or columns in a Worksheet.

If you are sorting rows or columns and want to keep legends and their rows or columns together, select the legends also.  Usually, you will want to select entire rows or columns.

To sort chart data,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the rows or columns you want to sort.

3	Choose Sort from the Data menu, then select a Sort method and a Sort Order.

4	Specify a number in the Column or Key Row text box to indicate the column or row that should serve as the key field for sorting.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Fill


Chart Data Statistics

Draw, Chart, Data, Statistics

Use Statistics to display statistical information about data in a row or column  in a Worksheet.

To display the statistics for a row or column,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a row or column cell for which you want to see statistical information.

3	Choose Statistics from the Data menu.

4	Select Row or Column.  The statistics are displayed in these categories:

# of Data Points

Minimum value

Maximum value

Average

Standard Deviation

Curve Fit Information

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas

Fit Info


# of Data points

Number of data cells in rows or columns.


Minimum value

Smallest data value in rows or columns.


Maximum value

Largest data value in rows or columns.


Average

Average of all data values in rows or columns.


Standard Deviation

How widely each data value in rows or columns differs from the Average.


Curve Fit Info

If the row or column contains a fit formula, the fit information is listed under Curve Fit Info.  Use the Fit Type button to change the type of fit without leaving the dialog box.


Chart Data Format

Draw, Chart, Data, Format

Use Format to control how numbers and dates are displayed in a Worksheet.

To change formatted data to default format,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the cells that will be affected by the format change.

3	Choose Format from the Data menu.

4	Select Numeric Format.

or... Select Date Format.

5	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Format options for more information:

Date Format

Numeric Format

See Also

Date Format


Chart Data Numeric Format

Draw, Chart, Data, Format

In a Worksheet, use Numeric Format to specify decimal precision, number format, type, and negative number style for selected data.

To select a new Numeric Format,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the Worksheet cells that will be affected by the new format.

3	Choose Format from the Data menu.

4	Select Numeric Format and an option other than General in the Formats list box.

5	Deselect Floating, then specify the number of decimal Digits you want to display to set precision of decimal places.

6	Select Parentheses to display negative numbers with parentheses instead of minus signs.

7	Select the number Types.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Date Format

Chart Data Format


 Hint

Floating means the number of decimal digits is adjusted to the size of the cell and rounded if necessary.


 Hint

For the number 1000, Currency displays $1000, Thousands displays 1,000, Percent displays 100000%, and Exponential displays 1E+03.

Do not combine Currency with Percent or Exponential.  Thousands has no effect when combined with Exponential.


Chart Data Date Format

Draw, Chart, Data, Format

Use Date Format to choose or edit a date format for selected data in a Worksheet.

To select or edit a date format,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the  cells that will be affected by the format change.

3	Choose Format from the Data menu.

4	Select Date Format and an option other than General in the Formats list box.

5	Choose a date format from the Formats list box.

or... Use the Date Codes and Time Codes pop-up lists to format the date.

or... Type a custom date format in the Edit Format text box.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Format

Chart Data Numeric Format

Edit Date Format

Formats


Chart Data Column Width

Draw, Chart, Data, Column Width

Use Column Width to set a common width for all columns in a Worksheet.

To change the width of Worksheet columns,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Column Width from the Data menu, then specify a column width (from 1 to 30).

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Delete

Insert


Chart Data Formulas

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Formulas to apply standard mathematical formulas to your Worksheet data.  The resulting data is placed in the results row or column.

To apply a formula to your data,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Formulas from the Data menu, then select the row or column to apply a formula.

3	Select Row Calculation or Column Calculation.

4	Select a formula from the Function list box.

5	Specify the Row or Column numbers and the row or column in which to place the result in the Formulas group box.

6	Specify the Order of Curve Fit and Number to Forecast if you choose a formula that requires it.

7	Select Fit Info to determine which fit is best for your application.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Absolute Value

Average

Chart Data Statistics

Cosine

Cumulative Total

Difference

Fit Info

Maximum

Minimum

Moving Average

Percent of Total

Sine

Sum


Absolute Value

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Absolute Value in a Worksheet to take the absolute value of each cell in a single row or column and place the results in the results row or column.  If your data is 3, -4, -2, the absolute values are 3, 4, 2.

To determine the Absolute Value,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the row or column where you want to place the absolute values.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation or Column Calculation.

5	Select Absolute Value from the Function list.

6	Specify the row or column that will have absolute values taken in the Rows or Columns text boxes.

7	Specify the row or column in which the absolute values will display.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Average

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Average in a Worksheet to average the cells in two or more rows or columns and place the results in the results row or column.

To find the Average,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the row or column where you want to place the averages.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation to average the rows you specify.

or... Select Column Calculation to average the columns you specify.

5	Select Average from the Function list.

6	Specify the rows or columns to be averaged in the Rows or Columns text boxes.  For example, 1,2,3 or A:C.

7	Specify the row or column in which the averages will display.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Cosine

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Cosine in a Worksheet to take the cosine of each value in one row or column and place the results in the results row or column.

To find the Cosine,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the row or column where you want to place the cosines.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation or Column Calculation.

5	Select Cosine from the Function list, then specify the row or column that will have the cosine function applied in the Rows or Columns text boxes.

6	Specify the row or column in which the cosines will display.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Cumulative Total

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Cumulative Total in a Worksheet to take the running total of one or more rows or columns and place the results in the results row or column.

To calculate the Cumulative Total,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the row or column where you want to place the cumulative totals.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation to total the rows.

or... Select Column Calculation to total the columns.

5	Select Cumulative Total from the Function list, then specify the rows or columns to be totaled.  For example, 1,2,3 or A:C.

6	Specify the row or column in which the cumulative totals will display.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Difference

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Difference in a Worksheet to subtract one row from another or one column from another and place the results in the results row or column.

To find the Difference between rows and columns,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the row or column where you want to place the difference.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation to find the difference of the rows.

or... Select Column Calculation to find the difference of the columns.

5	Select Difference from the Function list, then specify the rows or columns to be subtracted.  For example, 1,2,3 or A:C.

6	Specify the row or column in which the differences will appear.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Maximum

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Maximum in a Worksheet to compare cell values in a row or column with corresponding cell values in the next row(s) or column(s).  The maximum value is entered in the results row or column.

To find the maximum value,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a row or column cell where you want the maximum values displayed.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation to determine the maximum values in all rows.

or... Select Column Calculation to determine the maximum values in all columns.

5	Select Maximum from the Function list, then specify the rows or columns.  For example, 1,2,3 or A:C.

6	Specify the row or column in which the maximum values will display, then choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Minimum

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Minimum in a Worksheet to compare cell values in a row or column with the corresponding cell values in the next row(s) or column(s).  The minimum value is entered in the results row or column.

To find the Minimum value,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the Worksheet row or column where you want to place the resulting minimum values.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation to determine the minimum values in all rows.

or... Select Column Calculation to determine the minimum values in all columns.

5	Select Minimum from the Function list, then specify the rows or columns.  For example, 1,2,3 or A:C.

6	Specify the row or column in which the minimum values will display, then choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Moving Average

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Moving Average in a Worksheet to find the moving average of one row or column.The average is entered in the results row or column.  A moving average is the average of each cell value with the values of the cells surrounding it.

To find the moving average,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the Worksheet row or column where you want to enter the moving average.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation to determine moving averages for rows.

or... Select Column Calculation to determine moving averages for columns.

5	Select Moving Average from the Function list.

6	Specify the rows or columns used for determining moving averages.

7	Specify how many cells before and after each cell to include in the moving average in the Average Before, After text box.

8	Specify the row or column in which the moving averages will display, then choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


 Hint

For example, if you type 2, the moving average for each cell will be the average of the current cell and the two cells on each side (a total of five cells).


Percent of Total

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Percent of Total in a Worksheet to figure the cell value as a percentage of all cells in a row or column.  The value is entered in the results row or column.

To figure the percent of total,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the Worksheet row or column where you want to place the resulting percent of total figures.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation to determine the percent of total in all rows.

or... Select Column Calculation to determine the percent of total in all columns.

5	Select Percent of Total from the Function list, then specify the rows or columns.  For example, 1,2,3 or A:C.

6	Specify the row or column in which the percentage values will display, then choose OK.

7	Choose OK.

The resulting percentages are expressed as decimal numbers.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Sine

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Sine in a Worksheet to find the sine of each value in a row or column and enter the values in the results row or column.

To find the Sine value,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the Worksheet row or column where you want to place the resulting sines.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation or Column Calculation.

5	Select Sine from the Function list, then specify the row or column that will have the sine function applied.

6	Specify the row or column in which the sines will appear.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Sum

Draw, Chart, Data, Formulas

Use Sum in a Worksheet to add two or more rows or columns and place the result in the results row or column.

To add two or more rows or columns,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the Worksheet row or column where you want to place the resulting sums.

3	Choose Formulas from the Data menu.

4	Select Row Calculation to find the sums for all rows.

or... Select Column Calculation to find the sums for all columns.

5	Select Sum from the Function list, then specify the rows or columns to be added.  For example, 1,2,3 or A:C.

7	Specify the row or column in which the sums will display, then choose OK.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


Chart Data Recalculate

Draw, Chart, Data, Recalculate

Use Recalculate in a Worksheet to update calculated values after you make changes in a row or column that is affected by a formula.

To update calculated values,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, change one or more cell values in the row(s) or column(s) affected by a formula.

3	Choose Recalculate from the Data menu.

See Also

Chart Data Formulas


 Hint

You must have previously defined a Formula for that particular row or column.


Include Row/Column

Draw, Chart, Data, Include Row/Col

Use Include Row/Col to specify what data should be inserted into your chart from your Worksheet.  Use this option to include data that was previously excluded.

To insert data from your Worksheet in your chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the Worksheet rows or columns you want to insert into the chart.

3	Choose Include Row/Col from the Data menu, then select Row(s) or Column(s).

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Exclude Row/Col

Redraw


Exclude Row/Column

Draw, Chart, Data, Exclude Row/Col

Use Exclude Row/Col to specify data not inserted into your chart from your Worksheet.  Unless you exclude some data, the chart will include all Worksheet data.

To exclude data from your Worksheet,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the Worksheet rows or columns you want to exclude.

3	Choose Exclude Row/Col from the Data menu, then select Row(s) or Column(s).

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Include Row/Col

Redraw


Chart Edit Menu

Draw, Chart, Edit

Use the Chart Edit menu to move around in a Worksheet and modify Worksheet data.  Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

These are the options on the Chart Edit Menu for data charts:

Insert

Delete

Clear

Cut

Copy

Paste

Paste Transposed

Select All

Go To Cell

Edit Cell

These are the options on the Chart Edit Menu for Text charts:

Delete

Cut

Copy

Paste


Edit a Worksheet

Draw, Chart

Editing a Worksheet lets you create and modify data charts.

To move around in the Worksheet,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, click in a cell to move directly to that cell.

or... Use the arrow keys to move to a cell.

or... Use Go to Cell to move to a cell.

Use the scroll bars to see more of the Worksheet.

To create or modify data in the Worksheet,

1	Select a cell you want to modify.

2	Type the data you want to appear in the cell.

or... Press Enter to edit rather than replace the data in the cell.

See Also

Chart Data Menu

Chart Edit Menu


 Hint

You can type numbers or characters.  The type of chart you are creating dictates the type of data you should include (a bar chart uses numbers but an organization chart uses words).


Chart Cut

Draw, Chart, Edit, Cut

Use Cut while editing a chart to remove selected information from a Worksheet and place it in the Clipboard.

To remove data from a Worksheet,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the cell containing data you want to cut.

or... Select the line of text you want to cut.

3	Choose Cut from the Edit menu.

See Also

Chart Copy

Chart Paste

Paste Transposed


 Hint

The information remains in the Clipboard until you Cut or Copy new information or until you exit Windows.


Chart Copy

Draw, Chart, Edit, Cut

Use Copy while editing a chart to insert a copy of selected information from a Worksheet in the Clipboard.

To copy data from a Worksheet,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the cell containing the data you want to copy.

or... Select the line of text you want to copy.

3	Choose Copy from the Edit menu.

See Also

Chart Cut

Chart Paste

Paste Transposed


Chart Paste

Draw, Chart, Edit, Paste

Use Paste while editing a chart to insert information currently in the Clipboard into a Worksheet.

To paste the contents of the Clipboard into a Worksheet,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the cell where you want to paste.

or... Select the line where you want the copied text to be pasted.

3	Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

See Also

Chart Copy

Chart Cut

Paste Transposed


 Hint

If you cut or copied a block of data from more than one cell, the cell you click becomes the top left corner of the block, and the data fills the cells to the right and down from it.

Pasted information will overwrite any existing information in a Worksheet.


Paste Transposed

Draw, Chart, Edit, Paste Transposed

Use Paste Transposed while editing a data chart to switch the rows and columns of selected cells.  Data from left to right will appear from top to bottom.  Data in the first row will be inserted in the first column and so forth.  The examples below show data before and after using the Paste Transposed command:

Before	After

1   4   7	1   3   6

3   9   2	4   9   8

6   8   5	7   2   5

To transpose pasted data ,

1	Select the cells you want to transpose.

2	Choose Cut from the Edit menu.

3	Select the cell where you want transposed data to begin.

4	Choose Paste Transposed from the Edit menu.

See Also

Chart Cut

Chart Paste


 Hint

The selection should contain the same number of rows and columns.  If you select more rows than columns (or vice versa), WP Presentations will take the larger of the two numbers and perform the function as if you had specified that number of rows and columns.


Chart Insert

Draw, Chart, Edit, Insert

Use Insert while editing a data chart to add rows or columns in a Worksheet.

To add rows or columns,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the row or column where you want another row or column inserted.

or... Select the area where you want new cells.

3	Choose Insert from the Edit menu.

4	Select Rows or Columns, then specify the number of rows or columns you want to insert.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Delete


 Hint

The new rows or columns will be inserted where you have selected a cell, and everything else will be pushed down (for rows) or to the right (for columns).


Chart Delete

Draw, Chart, Edit, Delete

Use Delete while editing a data chart to remove rows or columns from a Worksheet.

To remove a row or column,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the row, column, or block of cells you want to remove.

3	Choose Delete from the Edit menu.

4	Select Rows or Columns, then specify the number of rows or columns you want to delete.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Clear

Chart Insert


 Hint

If you want to delete several rows or columns, select the first cells of the groups you want to delete (the left column or the top row).  You can also delete a block of cells from several rows and columns.


 Hint

When you remove rows or columns, existing rows or columns move up (for rows) or left (for columns) to fill the empty space.


Chart Clear

Draw, Chart, Edit, Clear

Use Clear while editing a data chart to erase the data in a cell, its format, or both.

To delete the contents or format of a cell,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the cell(s) you want to delete.

3	Choose Clear from the Edit menu.

4	Select Data, Format, or Both.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Delete


Chart Select All

Draw, Chart, Edit, Select All

Use Select All while editing a data chart to select all cells in a Worksheet.

To use Select All,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Select All from the Edit menu.

See Also

Select


Go To Cell

Draw, Chart, Edit, Go To Cell

Use Go To Cell while editing a data chart to move to any cell in a Worksheet.

To use Go To Cell,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Go To Cell from the Edit menu.

3	Specify the cell you want to move to.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Moving to a Cell


Edit Cell

Draw, Chart, Edit, Edit Cell

Use Edit Cell while editing a data chart to modify data in an individual cell in your Worksheet.

To edit data in a cell,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select the cell you want to modify.

3	Choose Edit Cell from the Edit menu.

or... Double-click the cell.

or... Press Enter.

4	Type your change in the Cell text box.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Clear

Go to Cell


 Hint

The value in the selected cell appears in the Cell text box, while its position in rows and columns appears below.


Chart File Menu

Draw, Chart, File

Use the Chart File menu to import, export, cancel, clear, or return a chart to the drawing window.  Click here for steps on getting into the Chart Editor:

Import

Export

File Manager

Retrieve Style

Save Style

Clear

Cancel

Return


Chart Import (Worksheet)

Draw, Chart, File, Import

Use Import from the File menu in the Chart Editor to import data from a Worksheet saved as an ASCII file.  When the Worksheet is opened, it displays its data and draws a chart based on that data.

To open a Worksheet in the Chart Editor,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Import from the File menu.

3	Type the name of the file in the Filename text box.

or... Click inside the Files list box, type the first few letters of the filename, and select the file you want.

4	Choose Import.

5	Select a Delimiter type for the imported data in an ASCII file.

6	Select the Clear Current Data check box if you want the imported Worksheet data to replace the current Worksheet data.

7	Select the Link to Spreadsheet check box if you want to link the imported Worksheet to an existing chart.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Import (Spreadsheet)

Chart Export


 Hint

When you link a Worksheet written in a format different from a WP Presentations chart, importing is no longer necessary; the chart can then be opened from the drawing window.


Chart Export (Worksheet)

Draw, Chart, File, Export

Use Export from the File menu in the Chart Editor to save a new file or a selected item or text within a file.  The Worksheet is saved in ASCII format, delimited by tabs, commas, or spaces.

To export a Worksheet in the Chart Editor,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Export from the File menu.

3	Type a filename in the Save As text box.

4	Select a Delimiter type for the exported data from the pop-up list.

5	Choose Save to save the file.

See Also

Chart Import (Worksheet)


 Hint

Unless you enter a full pathname to another directory, the file is saved in the current directory.


Chart Import (Spreadsheet)

Draw, Chart, File, Import

Use Import from the File menu in the Chart Editor to insert a spreadsheet or text file created from another application into the Worksheet of the Chart Editor.

To import a spreadsheet from another program,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Import from the File menu.

3	Type the filename in the Filename text box.

or... Click inside the Files list box, type the first few letters of the filename, and select the file you want.

4	Choose Import.

5	Specify the column and row numbers of the data you want to import in the Range text box if you are importing a spreadsheet.

or... Select the range you want to import in the Range Name list box.

Reference shows the full range in your spreadsheet.

6	Select the File Format and the Delimiter if you are importing a text file.

7	Select Clear Current Data to clear the current Worksheet.

8	Select Transpose Data and Link to Spreadsheet if you want to transpose data or link this spreadsheet to a chart.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Import (Worksheet)

Chart Export


Chart Clear Data

Draw, Chart, File, Clear

Use Clear from the File menu in the Chart Editor to clear all current data from your Worksheet.

To clear current data from your Worksheet,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Clear from the File menu, then choose Yes.

See Also

Chart Clear


Chart Style

Draw, Chart, File, Retrieve Style or Save Style

Use Retrieve Style or Save Style to retrieve or save a chart style so you can use the same box options and attributes, bullets, and other chart characteristics.  Data and text are not saved.

To retrieve a chart style,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Retrieve Style from the File menu.

3	Type the filename in the Filename text box.

or... Click inside the Files list box, type the first few letters of the filename, and select the file you want.

4	Choose Retrieve.

To save a chart style,

1	Create or modify a chart with styles you want to apply to other charts.

2	Choose Save Style from the File menu.

3	Type a filename in the Save As text box.

4	Choose Save.

See Also

Chart Export


 Hint

Unless you enter a full pathname to another directory, the file is saved in the current directory.


Chart Options Menu

Draw, Chart, Options

Use the Chart Options menu to select options for data charts. Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

These are the options on the Chart Options menu for data charts:

Layout

Series

Axis

Grid/Tick

Frame

Perspective

Titles

Legend

Labels

These are the options on the Chart Options menu for text charts:

Bullet Chart Options Menu

Organization Chart Options Menu

See Also

Pie Chart Layout

Table/Surface Options


Chart Layout

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout

Use Layout in a data chart to control how data charts display.

To set chart layout options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

3	Select from the following layout options:

3D

Horizontal

Display Table

Style

Sizes

4	Select Display Table, choose Table to set options for a table, then choose OK.

5	Choose OK.

To set chart layout options from the Chart Tool Palette,

1	Select from the following layout tools from the Chart Tool Palette:

 3D

 Horizontal

 Display Table

 Cluster

 Overlap

 Stacked

 Stacked 100%

See Also

Chart Axis

Chart Frame

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Labels

Chart Legend

Chart Perspective

Chart Series

Chart Table/Surface Options

Chart Titles


3D

Displays the chart in three dimensions.


Horizontal

Displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically.


Display Table

Displays a table of the Worksheet data below the graph.


Style

Sets a Style:  Cluster, Overlap, Stacked, or Stacked 100%.


Sizes

Sets the Width, Depth, Height, and Overlap percentage.


Hi-Lo Chart Layout

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout

Use Layout to control how a Hi-Lo chart displays.

To use Layout, a Hi-Lo chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set Hi-Lo Chart layout options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

3	Select from the following layout options:

3D

Horizontal

Display Table

Type

Sizes

4	Select Display Table and choose Table to set options for a table.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Table/Surface Options

Hi-Lo Chart


Type

Sets Line, Bar/Error Bar, Error Bar, or Area.


Sizes

Sets the Width, Depth, and Height.


Chart Axis

Draw, Chart, Options, Axis

Use Axis in a data chart to control the display of the axes.

To set axis options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Axis from the Options menu.

3	Select the axis (Y1, Y2, or X).

4	Specify the Minimum and Maximum Value to be viewed on the axis.

5	Specify the Label Scale Factor to divide the Maximum Value.

6	Select a Linear or Logarithmic Scaling Method.

7	Choose Grid/Tick to set grid and tick options, then choose OK.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Frame

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Labels

Chart Layout

Chart Legend

Chart Perspective

Chart Series

Chart Titles


 Hint

Minimum numbers must be equal to or less than the lowest number in the Worksheet; minimum values must be equal to or greater than the highest number in the Worksheet.

To reset the Minimum Value, Maximum Value, or Major Tick Value to the default, select Auto.


 Hint

For example, if the Maximum Value for an axis is 100 and the Label Scale factor is 2, the new Maximum value will be 50.


Chart Frame

Draw, Chart, Options, Frame

Use Frame in a data chart to determine how data charts base and frame(s) will display.

To set frame options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Frame from the Options menu.

3	Select where the frame will appear in the chart.

4	Specify the Base Height.

5	Select a Color and Pattern from the color and pattern palettes.

6	Choose Fill or Line to select the frame's attributes.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Axis

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Labels

Chart Layout

Chart Legend

Chart Perspective

Chart Series

Chart Titles

Fill Attributes

Line Attributes


Chart Grid/Tick

Draw, Chart, Options, Grid/Tick

Use Grid/Tick in a data chart to determine how grid and tick lines display.

To set grid and tick options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Grid/Tick from the Options menu.

3	Select the axis (Y1, Y2, or X) for the options you want.

4	Choose the settings and color for Major and Minor grid and tick lines from the color palette and pop-up lists.

5	Choose Axis to set axis options, then choose OK.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Axis

Chart Frame

Chart Labels

Chart Layout

Chart Legend

Chart Perspective

Chart Series

Chart Titles


Chart Labels

Draw, Chart, Options, Labels

Use Labels to format labels in a data chart.

To set labels options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Labels from the Options menu.

3	Select the type of labels you want to create.

4	Choose Data Labels, select Display, then choose an option from the Position pop-up list.

5	Select Stagger and Ticks on Intervals options and specify the Interval value to determine label display on the X axis.

6	Choose Font to select the font, point size, and appearance of the label text, then choose OK.

7	Choose Attributes to select the color, attributes, border color, and style of the label boxes and borders, then choose OK.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Box Attributes

Chart Axis

Chart Frame

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Layout

Chart Legend

Chart Perspective

Chart Series

Chart Titles

Font


Chart Legend

Draw, Chart, Options, Legend

Use Legend to format a descriptive legend in a data chart.

To set legend options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Legend from the Options menu.

3	Select Display Legend to set legend options.

4	Select from the following legend options:

Inside Chart

Outside Chart

Position

Horizontal

Vertical

Attributes

Series Font

Font

5	Enter a legend name in the Name text box.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Box Attributes

Chart Axis

Chart Frame

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Labels

Chart Layout

Chart Perspective

Chart Series

Chart Titles

Font


Inside Chart

Positions the legend inside the chart.


Outside Chart

Positions the legend outside the chart.


Position

Determines the side of the chart where the legend appears.


Horizontal

Displays the chart legend horizontally.


Vertical

Displays the chart legend vertically.


Attributes

Determines the style, color, and fill attributes of the legend box and border.


Series Font

Determines the font, appearance, and point size of the legend text.


Font

Determines the font, appearance, color, and point size of the title text.


Chart Series

Draw, Chart, Options, Series

Use Series to define how each series of data will display in a data chart.

To set series options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, select a cell in the series you want to define, then choose Series from the Options menu.

or... Choose Series from the Options menu, then type the name of the series in the Current Series text box.

or... Choose Series from the Options menu, then use the Previous and Next buttons to specify the series you want.

3	Select a current series type in the Type group box.

4	Choose a Marker Type from the Type pop-up list, then specify a Size.

5	Select the Color, Pattern, Fill Attributes, and Line Attributes for the series.

6	Select an axis.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Axis

Chart Frame

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Labels

Chart Layout

Chart Legend

Chart Perspective

Chart Titles

Fill Attributes

Line Attributes


Chart Perspective

Draw, Chart, Options, Perspective

Use Perspective to adjust the 3-D viewing perspective in a data chart.  The 3-D Layout option must be selected.

To set perspective options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Perspective from the Options menu.

3	Select Right Angle Axes for the back side of the frame to appear at a right angle.

4	Specify a Horizontal value.  You can also use the scroll bar under the view box.  A low Horizontal value appears as a sideways view; a high Horizontal value appears as a straight-on view.

5	Specify a Vertical value.  You can also use the scroll bar to the right of the view box.  A low Vertical value appears as a top view; a high Vertical value appears as a straight-on view.

6	Select Wire Frame View to display objects in the view box as a series of frames with no colors.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Axis

Chart Frame

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Labels

Chart Layout

Chart Legend

Chart Series

Chart Titles


Chart Titles

Draw, Chart, Options, Titles

Use Titles to create titles in a data chart.

To create chart titles,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Titles from the Options menu.

3	Type the title, subtitle, and axis titles in the text boxes.

4	Choose Options to set position, font, and box attributes for a title.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Axis

Chart Frame

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Labels

Chart Layout

Chart Legend

Chart Perspective

Chart Series

Chart Titles Options


Chart Titles Options

Draw, Chart, Options, Titles, Options

Use Titles Options to set the position, font, and box attributes of data chart titles.

To set title options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Titles from the Options menu.

3	Choose Options in the Titles dialog box, then select the title you want.

4	Choose an option from the Position pop-up list to position the title.

5	Choose Font to set the title font.

6	Choose Attributes to set box attributes for the title.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Box Attributes

Font

Chart Titles


Pie Chart Layout

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout

Use Pie Chart Layout to set the appearance of a pie chart.

To use Pie Chart Layout, a pie chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set pie chart options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

3	Specify the pie chart number in the Current Pie text box.

or... Use Previous and Next to specify the pie chart.

4	Select from the following layout options:

3D

Proportional Pies

Display Table

Explode Slice

Appearance

Pie Options

Link Pies

5	Choose OK.

To set pie chart options from the Pie Chart Tool Palette,

1	Select from the following on the pie chart tool palette:

 3-D Layout

 Proportional Pies

 Display Table

See Also

Chart Table/Surface Options

Pie Chart Appearance

Pie Chart Explode Slice

Pie Chart Pie Options

Pie Chart Link Pies


Proportional Pies

Proportionally sizes 2 or more pies in the current Worksheet.


Explode Slice

Separates a slice from the rest of the pie.


Appearance

Sets depth, size, angle, and tilt.


Pie Options

Makes the pie a column or sorts it by slice size.


Link Pies

Links a pie piece to another pie.


Chart Table/Surface Options

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout

Use Table/Surface Options to set the table display options In a Table or Surface Chart.

To use Table/Surface Options, you must select Display Table, or have a table or surface chart displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set options for a table or surface chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

or... Choose Table from the Layout dialog box.

3	For tables, select from these table options:

Label Dividers

Full Grid

Range Colors

Fill Color

Line Color

4	For surface charts, select from these surface options:

3D

Outline Contours

Display Table

Outline Color

5	Choose Font to set the font.

6	Select colors for percentages in the table or surface chart from the color palettes in the Range Colors group box to .

7	Select the starting color (at the 1-10%row) and the ending color (at the 91-100% row) and choose Blend to blend the Range Colors.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Layout

Surface Chart

Table


Label Dividers

Draws a heavy border under the row titles and to the right of the column titles in the table.


Full Grid

Draws border lines for each cell in the table.


Range Colors

Displays the table in the range colors.


Fill Color

Displays the whole table in one color.


Line Color

Sets the line color in the table.


Outline Contours

Draws an outline around each area in the chart.


Outline Color

Sets the outline color in the chart.


Pie Chart Pie Options

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout, Pie Options

Use Pie Options to set the features of the current pie chart.

To use Pie Options, a pie chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set Pie Options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

3	Select from the following options in the Pie Options group box:

Column

Sort Slice

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Pie Chart Appearance

Pie Chart Explode Slice

Pie Chart Link Pies

Pie Chart Layout


Column

Displays the pie as a stacked column.


Sort Slice

Arranges the pie slices by size.


Pie Chart Explode Slice

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout, Explode Slice

Use Explode Slice to separate a selected slice from a pie chart.

To use Explode Slice, a pie chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To explode a slice,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

3	Specify the pie chart number in the Current Pie text box.

or... Use Previous and Next to specify the pie chart.

4	Specify the Slice number in the Explode Slice group box.

5	Specify the distance (1 to 200) that the slice will be separated from the pie.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Explode Chart

Pie Chart Appearance

Pie Chart Link Pies

Pie Chart Layout

Pie Chart Pie Options


Pie Chart Link Pies

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout, Link Pies

Use Link Pies to project data from a pie slice in one chart to another pie chart.

To use Link Pies, two pie charts must be displayed in the Chart Editor.  The Pie Chart Help topic explains how to create more than one pie chart in a Worksheet.

To use Link Pies,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, create or retrieve the pie charts you want to link.

3	Choose Layout from the Options menu.

4	Specify the pie number in the Current Pie text box.

or... Use the Previous or Next buttons to specify the pie.

5	Select Link from the Link Pies group box.

6	Specify the number of the slice you want to link.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Pie Chart

Pie Chart Appearance

Pie Chart Explode Slice

Pie Chart Layout

Pie Chart Pie Options


Pie Chart Labels

Draw, Chart, Options, Labels

Use Labels to format pie chart labels.

To label a pie chart, a pie chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set labels options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, create or retrieve the pie charts you want to label.

3	Choose Labels from the Options menu.

4	Choose options from the Value, Percent, and Label pop-up lists to position the label.

5	Select a label Orientation.

6	Choose an option from the Leader pop-up list to insert a line from an outside Value, Percent, and Label into the chart.

7	Choose Font to change the font in the labels, then choose OK.

8	Choose Attributes to set box attributes, then choose OK.

9	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Pie Chart Labels options for more information:

Box Attributes

Font

See Also

Chart Labels

Pie Chart Layout


Pie Chart Appearance

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout, Appearance

Use Appearance to change the appearance of a pie chart.

To set the Appearance, a pie chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set pie chart options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

3	Specify the pie number in the Current Pie text box.

or... Use the Previous or Next buttons to specify the pie chart.

4	Specify the Depth in the Appearance group box to set the thickness of your pie chart.

5	Specify the Size.

6	Specify the Angle to position the slices.

7	Specify the Tilt to orient your pie chart in the window.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Pie Chart

Pie Chart Explode Slice

Pie Chart Layout

Pie Chart Pie Options


 Hint

Larger numbers make thicker pies.


 Hint

Larger numbers make flatter pies.


Bullet Chart Options Menu

Draw, Chart, Bullet Chart, Options

Use the Options menu in the Chart Editor to select options for bullet charts.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Chart Editor:

Layout

Box Attributes

Box Options

Define Bullets


Bullet Chart Layout

Draw, Chart, Bullet Chart, Options, Layout

Use Layout to control the levels, justification, and fonts in your bullet chart.

To set layout options, a bullet chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set bullet chart layout options,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

3	Select the level of the chart.

4	Select a justification type from the Justification group box.

5	Choose Font to set the text font.

6	Select Size Area to Text

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Box Attributes

Bullet Chart

Bullet Chart Box Options

Bullet Chart Define Bullets

Font


Box Attributes

Draw, Chart, Options, Box Attributes

Use Box Attributes to define the interior and border styles of all boxes.

To set box attributes, a bullet chart or organization chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To define box attributes,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Box Attributes from the Options menu.

3	Choose an option from the  Box Style pop-up list.

4	Select a color from the Fill color palette.

or... Choose Attributes to change fill colors and patterns.

5	Select a color from the Border color palette in the Border group box.

6	Choose an option from the Border Style pop-up list.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Bullet Chart

Bullet Chart Box Options

Fill Attributes

Organization Chart

Organization Chart Box Options


Bullet Chart Box Options

Draw, Chart, Bullet Chart, Options, Box Options

Use Box Options to specify which parts of the outline to highlight with a box and the position of the box.

To set box option, a bullet chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To define box options from the dialog box,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Box Options from the Options menu.

3	Select the parts of the chart you want in boxes in the Display group box.

4	Select the placement of the boxes in the Position group box.

5	Choose OK.

To set box options from the Bullet Chart Tool Palette,

1	Select from the following tools on the Bullet Chart Tool Palette:

 Highlight Title

 Highlight Body

 Highlight All

 Highlight None

To set the Position from the Bullet Chart Tool Palette,

1	Select from the following tools on the Bullet Chart Tool Palette:

 Position Above

 Position Behind

 Position Below

 Position Above and Below

See Also

Box Attributes

Bullet Chart

Bullet Chart Define Bullets

Bullet Chart Layout


Bullet Chart Define Bullets

Draw, Chart, Bullet Chart, Options, Define Bullets

Use Define Bullets to choose the appearance of the bullets in a chart.

To define bullets, a bullet chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To define bullets,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Define Bullets from the Options menu.

3	Choose a format from the Predefined Formats pop-up list.

4	Highlight the Level of bullet you want to assign in the Level/Style list box.

5	Choose the style you want from the Style icon.

6	Select a bullet color from the color palette.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Box Attributes

Bullet Chart

Bullet Chart Box Options

Bullet Chart Layout


 Hint

If you select a level other than 1, select the Attach Previous Level check box to make the previous level display with the selected bullet.


 Hint

The bullet you select appears next to the Level number in the Level/Style list box.


Chart Text Menu

Draw, Chart, Text

Use the items on the Text menu in the Chart Editor to set fonts, appearance, and layout for text charts.

Font

Normal

Bold

Italic

Underline

Date

Search/Replace

Layout

Advance

Speller

WP Characters


Organization Chart Options Menu

Draw, Chart, Options

In an Organization Chart, use the Chart Options menu in the Chart Editor to select options for your current organization chart.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Chart Editor:

Layout

Box Attributes

Box Options

Connectors

Set Top

Staff


Organization Chart Layout

Draw, Chart, Options, Layout

Use Layout to control the layout of the organization chart.

To set layout options, an organization chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set organization chart layout options from the dialog box,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Layout from the Options menu.

3	Select a Level Arrangement for the second level from the Second pop-up list.

4	Select a Level Arrangement for middle levels from the Middle pop-up list.

5	Select a Level Arrangement for the last level from the Last pop-up list.

6	Select the Orientation.

7	Specify the number of Levels Displayed from Top.

8	Choose Font to set the text font.

9	Choose OK.

To set Orientation layout options from the Organization Chart Tool Palette,

1	Select from the following orientation layout tools on the tool palette:

 Top to Bottom

 Bottom to Top

 Left to Right

 Right to Left

See Also

Box Attributes

Font

Organization Chart Box Options

Organization Chart Connectors

Organization Chart Set Top

Organization Chart Staff


Organization Chart Box Options

Draw, Chart, Options, Box Options

Use Box Options to set box size, justify text, and turn boxes on or off.

To set box options, an organization chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To define box options from the dialog box,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Box Options from the Options menu.

3	Select which levels will have boxes from the Display group box.

4	Select the box height from the Height pop-up list.

5	Select the box width from the Width pop-up list.

6	Choose the desired justification from the Text Justification pop-up list.

7	Choose OK.

To define box display (on or off) from the Organization Chart Tool Palette,

1	Select from the following display tools on the tool palette:

 Display None

 First Level

 First/Middle Levels

 All Levels

See Also

Box Attributes

Organization Chart

Organization Chart Layout

Organization Chart Connectors

Organization Chart Set Top

Organization Chart Staff


Organization Chart Connectors

Draw, Chart, Options, Connectors

Use Connectors to display how different positions in an organization chart are connected.

To define connectors, an organization chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To define chart connectors,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Connectors from the Options menu.

3	Select a Connector Style to set the line style connecting different levels.

4	Select a Staff Line Style to set the line style connecting staff positions.

5	Select a connector color from the color palette.

6	Select Display Arrows to include arrowheads showing the chart flow.

7	Select Display Connectors to display chart connectors.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Box Attributes

Organization Chart

Organization Chart Box Options

Organization Chart Layout

Organization Chart Set Top

Organization Chart Staff


Organization Chart Staff

Draw, Chart, Options, Staff

Use Staff to display a link from the main organization chart to an independent position (box).

To set staff options, an organization chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To define a staff entry in an organization chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, create a new entry as the independent position.

3	Place the insertion point on the position that needs the staff line attached.

4	Choose Staff from the Options menu.

See Also

Box Attributes

Organization Chart

Organization Chart Box Options

Organization Chart Connectors

Organization Chart Layout

Organization Chart Set Top


Organization Chart Set Top

Draw, Chart, Options, Set Top

In an Organization Chart, use Set Top to designate any title as the top of the organization chart.  Only that title and its subordinate boxes will display.

To set the top of an organization chart, an organization chart must be displayed in the Chart Editor.

To set the top of an organization chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, place the insertion point on the position that will be at the top of the organization chart.

3	Choose Set Top from the Options menu.

See Also

Box Attributes

Organization Chart

Organization Chart Box Options

Organization Chart Connectors

Organization Chart Layout

Organization Chart Staff


Chart View Menu

Draw, Chart, View

Use the Chart View menu in the Chart Editor to set your view of the current Worksheet and chart.  If you are using a bullet chart or organization chart, an outline is substituted for the Worksheet.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Chart Editor:

These are the items on the View menu for data charts:

Redraw

Data Only

Chart Only

Data and Chart

Button Bar

Button Bar Setup

These are the items on the View menu for text charts:

Redraw

Text Only

Chart Only

Text and Chart

Reveal Codes

Button Bar

Button Bar Setup


Redraw

Draw, Chart, View, Redraw

Use Redraw to redraw the current chart.  This inserts Worksheet or text modifications in the chart, and may correct temporarily distorted graphics.

To redraw a chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Redraw from the View menu.

or... Choose the Redraw button.

See Also

Chart Only

Data and Chart

Data Only

Text and Chart

Text Only


Chart Only

Draw, Chart, View, Chart Only

Use Chart Only to display the chart you are working on without showing the Worksheet or outline.

To use Chart Only in a chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Chart Only from the View menu.

See Also

Data and Chart

Data Only

Redraw

Text and Chart

Text Only


 Hint

You can drag the black bar that separates the two windows to adjust the window size.


Data Only

Draw, Chart, View, Data Only

Use Data Only in a data chart to display the full Worksheet you are working on without showing the chart.

To use Data Only in a data chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Data Only  from the View menu.

See Also

Chart Only

Data and Chart

Redraw


Text Only

Draw, Chart, View, Text Only

Use Text Only in a text chart to display the full Text Chart Outliner you are working on without showing its chart.

To display only text in an active text chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Text Only from the View menu.

See Also

Chart Only

Text and Chart

Redraw


Data and Chart

Draw, Chart, View, Data and Chart

Use Data and Chart in a data chart to display the Worksheet you are working on and its chart.  Data and Chart is a default setting in the Chart Editor.

To use display both data and chart in a data chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Data and Chart from the View menu.

See Also

Chart Only

Data Only

Redraw


Text and Chart

Draw, Chart, View, Text and Chart

Use Text and Chart in a text chart to display the Text Chart Outliner you are working on and its chart.  Text and Chart is a default setting in the Chart Editor.

To use display both text and chart in a text chart,

1	Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:

2	From the Chart Editor, choose Text and Chart from the View menu.

See Also

Chart Only

Text Only

Redraw


Bitmap

Draw, Bitmap

Use the Bitmap Editor to create or edit a bitmap image.

To open the Bitmap Editor,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Bitmap from the Draw menu.)

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the bitmap graphic.

or... Click once to create a full page figure.

3	Use the tools on the bitmap tool palette to create a bitmap image.

See Also

Bitmap File Menu

Bitmap Tool Palette

Bitmap View Menu

Cancel

Clear

Draw

Figure

Paint

Text


Text

Draw, Text

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Text

Use the Text Editor to create or edit text.

To open the Text Editor,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Text from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Text from the Paint menu.)

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the text.

or... Click once to create a single text line.

3	Type your text.

Text created in the Bitmap Editor can only be edited as a bitmap.

See Also

Bold

Font

Italic

Retrieve Text

Text Area

Text Line

Underline


Bitmap Tool Palette

Use the Bitmap Tool Palette tools to edit and create bitmap images.

To learn more about the tool palette,

1	Place the pointer on the tool palette.

2	Click to open a pop-up definition on how to use that particular tool.

3	Click anywhere in the graphic to close the pop-up.

See Also
Bitmap
Chart
Chart Tool Palette
Tool Palette


Figure

Draw, Figure

Use Figure to define a figure area for a retrieved .WPG file and other imported graphics files, or a figure chosen from the Figure Gallery.

To retrieve a figure,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Figure from the Draw menu.)

2	Drag to create an area for the figure.

or... Click once to create a full-page figure.

3	Select a figure category and choose Figures.

4	Select the figure you want, then choose Retrieve.

See Also

Figure Gallery

Open

Tool Palette


Figure Gallery

Draw, Figure

Use the Figure Gallery to select a figure to place in the current drawing window.

To access the Figure Gallery,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Figure from the Draw menu.)

2	Drag to create an area for the figure.

or... Click once to create a full-page figure.

3	Choose the category of figures you want to open from the Figure Gallery dialog box.

4	Choose Figures to view thumbnail sketches of the figures.

5	Select the figure you want, then choose Retrieve.

or... To see to the figure categories again, choose Categories.

6	Choose Other File to retrieve a figure not in the Figure Gallery, then specify the filename of the figure and choose Retrieve.

Choose from the following Figure options for more information:

Save As WPG

Filename

Retrieve

See Also

Figure

Gallery Options

Open

Tool Palette


Figure Other File

Draw, Figure

Use Other File to retrieve a graphics file into a figure area.

To import a figure,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Figure from the Draw menu.)

2	Drag to create an area for the figure.

or... Click once to create a full-page figure.

3	Choose Other File.

4	Type the filename including the full pathname in the Filename text box.

or... Select the file you want from the Files list box.

5	Choose Retrieve.

See Also

Figure

Figure Retrieve

Tool Palette


Figure Retrieve

Draw, Figure

Use Retrieve to place a WP Presentations figure in the current drawing window.

To retrieve a figure,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Figure from the Draw menu.)

2	Drag to create an area for the figure.

or... Click once to create a full-page figure.

3	Choose the category of figures you want to view from the Figure Gallery dialog box,.

4	Choose Figures to view thumbnail sketches of the figures in the selected category, then choose the figure you want.

5	Choose Retrieve.

6	Choose Other File to retrieve a figure not in the Figure Gallery, then specify the filename of the figure and choose Retrieve.

See Also

Draw

Figure

Figure: Other File

Tool Palette


Figure Save As WPG

Draw, Figure, Save As WPG

Use Save As WPG to save figures as .wpg files in a directory you specify.

To save figures as .wpg files,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Figure from the Draw menu.)

2	Drag to create an area for the figure.

or... Click once to create a full-page figure.

3	Choose the figure or figure category you want.

4	Choose Save As WPG.

5	Select Current Image, Current Category, or All Categories.

6	Type the directory for the new .wpg files in the Directory text box.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Figure

Figure Gallery

Save in Bitmap Format

Select Directory


 Hint

You can click the folder icon to find directories.


Bitmap Paint Menu

Draw, Bitmap, Paint

Use the Bitmap Paint menu to create bitmap images.  Most Paint menu items appear on the Bitmap tool palette.  Click here or instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

Paint Brush

Air Brush

Flood Fill

Pickup Color

Selective Eraser

Eraser

Text

Curve

Closed Curve

Bézier

Arrow

Line

Polygon

Regular Polygon

Rectangle

Rounded Rectangle

Ellipse

Elliptical Arc

Circle

Circular Arc

See Also

Bitmap

Bitmap Tool Palette

Draw

Tool Palette


 Air Brush

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Air Brush

Use the Air Brush to spray colors and patterns. The slower you drag the mouse, the denser the spray becomes.

To spray with the Air Brush,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, click [image] in the Bitmap tool palette.  (You can also choose Air Brush from the Paint menu.)

3	Drag the Air Brush to create a continuous stream.

or... Click to paint spots of color.

See Also

Bitmap Tool Palette

Brush Attributes

Color Attributes

Fill Attributes: Pattern


 Eraser

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Eraser

Use the Eraser to change pixels to the current page background color.

To erase,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, click [image] in the Bitmap tool palette.  (You can also choose Eraser from the Paint menu.)

3	Drag the eraser over the pixels you want to erase.

See Also

Bitmap Tool Palette

Brush Attributes

Color Attributes

Selective Eraser


 Flood Fill

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Flood Fill

Use Flood Fill to change the color or fill pattern of an area in a bitmap image.

To flood fill an area,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, to change the color, click [image] from the tool palette, then select a color.  (You can also choose Color from the Attributes menu, select a color, then choose OK.)

3	To change the pattern, click [image], then select a pattern.

4	Click [image] in the Bitmap Tool Palette.  (You can also choose Flood Fill from the Paint menu.)

5	Click the area that you want to flood fill.

or... Choose Zoom from the View menu, then click the area in the Pixel Editor you want to flood fill.

See Also

Attributes

Bitmap Tool Palette

Pickup Color

Zoom


 Hint

You can change the foreground and background colors for the pattern by choosing Color from the Attributes menu, making changes to the foreground and background colors, then choosing OK.


 Paint Brush

Draw , Bitmap, Paint, Paint Brush

Use the Paint Brush to paint colored lines and patterns in a bitmap image.

To paint freehand lines,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, click [image] in the Bitmap tool palette.  (You can also choose Paint Brush from the Paint menu.)

3	To change the color, click [image] from the tool palette, then select a color.  (You can also choose Color from the Attributes menu, select a color, then choose OK.)

4	Drag the paint brush.

See Also

Bitmap Tool Palette

Brush Attributes


 Pickup Color

Draw , Bitmap, Paint, Pickup Color

Use Pickup Color to copy the color used in another bitmap image or object.

To pick up a color,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, click [image] in the Bitmap tool palette.  (You can also choose Pickup Color from the Paint menu.)

3	Click the object with the desired color.

4	Choose a tool from the tool palette to place the pickup color.

See Also

Flood Fill


 Selective Eraser

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Selective Eraser

Use the Selective Eraser to paint with the background color over a selected foreground color in a bitmap image.

To erase a selected foreground color,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Bitmap Editor:

2	From the Bitmap Editor, click [image] in the Bitmap tool palette.  (You can also choose Selective Eraser from the Paint menu.)

3	Choose Color from the Attributes menu, select Fill Background, then choose the color you want to replace the foreground color.

4	Choose OK.

5	Drag the eraser over the area you want to erase.

See Also

Brush Attributes

Color Attributes

Eraser


 Hint

The Fill Foreground color shown in the Color Attributes dialog box is the current foreground color (the color you want to replace with the background color).  You can select another from the color palette if you want.


Draw Menu

Use the Draw menu to create charts, bitmap drawings, figure drawings, text items, lines, curves, and shapes.  You can also select most Draw menu items from the tool palette.

Chart

Bitmap

Figure

Text

Curve

Closed Curve

Freehand

Bezier

Arrow

Line

Polygon

Regular Polygon

Rectangle

Rounded Rectangle

Ellipse

Elliptical Arc

Circle

Circular Arc

See Also

Bitmap Paint Menu

Tool Palette


Tool Palette

Use the Tool Palette to choose drawing and editing tools.

To learn more about the tool palette,

1	Place the pointer on the tool palette.

2	Click to open a pop-up definition on how to use that particular tool.

3	Click anywhere in the graphic to close the pop-up.

See Also
Bitmap
Bitmap Tool Palette
Chart
Chart Tool Palette
Pop-up Menu


Pop-up Menu

Use the Pop-up Menu to select or edit objects in the drawing window.

To select objects using the Pop-up Menu,

1	Place the pointer away from objects in the drawing window.

2	Press the right mouse button.

3	Choose Select from the Pop-up Menu, then click an object to select it.

or... Choose Select All from the Pop-up Menu to select all objects.

To edit an object using the Pop-up Menu,

1	Place the pointer on the object you want to edit.

2	Press the right mouse button.

3	Choose from the options listed.

See Also

Edit

Tool Palette


Curve

Draw, Curve

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Curve

Use Curve to draw a continuous curved line.

To draw a curved line,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Curve from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Curve from the Paint menu.)

2	Click to begin the curved line.

3	Click at each place where the curve should change directions.

4	Double-click to finish.

See Also

Bézier

Bitmap Tool Palette

Circular Arc

Closed Curve

Elliptical Arc

Tool Palette


Closed Curve

Draw, Closed Curve

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Closed Curve

Use Closed Curve to draw a curved shape filled with current color and pattern attributes.

To draw a closed curve shape,

1	If desired, choose a fill color or fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Closed Curve from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Closed Curve from the Paint menu.)

3	Click once to begin the curved shape.

4	Click at each place where the curve should change directions.

5	Double-click to finish.

See Also

Bézier

Bitmap Tool Palette

Circular Arc

Curve

Elliptical Arc

Tool Palette


Freehand

Draw, Freehand

Use Freehand to draw fluid lines as you would with a pen or pencil.

To create a freehand line,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Freehand from the Draw menu.)

2	Drag the pointer to create the line.

3	Release the mouse button to complete the line.

See Also

Line

Tool Palette


Bezier Curve
Bézier Curve

Draw, Bézier

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Bézier

Use Bézier Curve to create a smooth, curved line with a series of vectors which can be moved and edited.

In this diagram, the points on the curve indicate where you should click to create the curve.  Drag the handles outside of the curves to define the height and sweep of the curves.

To create a bézier curve,

1	Choose Bézier from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Bézier from the Paint menu.

2	Click to start the curve.

3	Move the pointer to the place where the curve should change direction.

4	Hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer to display two control handles.

5	Move a handle to change the shape of the curve between the current point and the previous point.

6	Release the mouse button to complete the curve.

7	Repeat steps 3 through 6 to create the next section of the curve.

8	Double-click to finish the curve.

See Also

Circular Arc

Closed Curve

Curve

Elliptical Arc


Arrow

Draw, Arrow

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Arrow

Use Arrow to draw a straight arrow.

To create a straight arrow,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Arrow from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Arrow from the Paint menu.)

3	Click once to start the arrow.

4	Move the pointer to where the arrow tail should end.

5	Click to complete the arrow.

See Also

Attributes

Bézier Curve

Bitmap Tool Palette

Curved Arrow

Double-Curved Arrow

Tool Palette


 Hint

You can hold down the Shift key to constrain the direction of the tail to a multiple of 45 degrees.


Curved Arrow

Draw, Arrow

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Arrow

Use Arrow to draw a curved arrow.

To create a curved arrow,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Arrow from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Arrow from the Paint menu.)

3	Move the pointer to where the arrow head should begin.

4	Drag the pointer to specify the angle of the curve, then release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer to create the curve for the arrow.

6	Click to complete the curved arrow.

See Also

Arrow

Attributes

Bézier Curve

Bitmap Tool Palette

Double-Curved Arrow

Tool Palette


Double-Curved Arrow

Draw, Arrow

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Arrow

Use Arrow to draw a double-curved arrow.

To create a double-curved arrow,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Arrow from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Arrow from the Paint menu.)

3	Move the pointer to where the arrow head should begin.

4	Drag the pointer to specify the angle of the curve, then release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer to create the first curve for the arrow.

6	Drag the pointer to create the second curve.

7	Release the mouse button to complete the double-curved arrow.

See Also

Arrow

Attributes

Bézier Curve

Bitmap Tool Palette

Curved Arrow

Tool Palette


Line

Draw, Line

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Line

Use Line to create lines and shapes in your drawing.

To draw a line,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Line from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Line from the Paint menu.)

2	Click to start the line.

3	For a straight line, move the pointer to the end of the line.  For a bent or zigzag line, click at each point where the line should change directions.

4	Double-click to complete the line.

See Also

Attributes

Bézier Curve

Bitmap Tool Palette

Circular Arc

Curve

Elliptical Arc

Polygon

Tool Palette


Polygon

Draw, Polygon

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Polygon

Use Polygon to create a polygon filled with the current color and pattern attributes.

To draw a polygon,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Polygon from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Polygon from the Paint menu.)

3	Click to begin the shape.

4	Move the pointer to the end of one side of the polygon, then click.

5	Repeat step 4 until the shape you want is outlined.

6	Double-click to complete the shape.

See Also

Attributes

Bitmap Tool Palette

Line

Regular Polygon

Tool Palette


Regular Polygon

Draw, Regular Polygon

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Regular Polygon

Use Regular Polygon to create polygons that have sides with equal lengths, such as triangles and octagons.

To draw a regular polygon,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Choose Regular Polygon from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Regular Polygon from the Paint menu.

3	In the Regular Polygon dialog box, type the number of sides for the shape.

4	Drag the pointer to create a shape from the starting point.

5	Release the mouse button to complete the shape.

See Also

Attributes

Bitmap Tool Palette

Line

Polygon

Tool Palette


 Hint

To reposition the regular polygon, hold down both mouse buttons while dragging.


Rectangle

Draw, Rectangle

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Rectangle

Use Rectangle to create a rectangle or a square that is filled with the current color and pattern attributes.

To draw a rectangle,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Rectangle from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Rectangle from the Paint menu.)

3	Drag the pointer to begin the rectangle.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the rectangle.

See Also

Attributes

Bitmap Tool Palette

Polygon

Regular Polygon

Rounded Rectangle

Tool Palette


Rounded Rectangle

Draw, Rounded Rectangle

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Rounded Rectangle

Use Rounded Rectangle to create a rectangle or square with rounded corners.

To draw a rounded rectangle,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Rounded Rectangle from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Rounded Rectangle from the Paint menu.)

3	Drag the pointer to begin the rectangle.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the rectangle.

See Also

Attributes

Bitmap Tool Palette

Polygon

Rectangle

Regular Polygon

Tool Palette


Ellipse

Draw, Ellipse

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Ellipse

Use Ellipse to draw circles and ellipses.

To draw an ellipse,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Ellipse from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Ellipse from the Paint menu.)

3	Drag the pointer to begin the ellipse.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the ellipse.

See Also

Attributes

Bitmap Tool Palette

Circle

Tool Palette


Elliptical Arc

Draw, Elliptical Arc

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Elliptical Arc

Use Elliptical Arc to create a half-arch.

To create an elliptical arc,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.  (You can also choose Elliptical Arc from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Elliptical Arc from the Paint menu.)

2	Drag the pointer to begin the arc.

3	Release the mouse button to complete the arc.

See Also

Attributes

Bézier Curve

Bitmap Tool Palette

Circular Arc

Curve

Tool Palette


Circle

Draw, Circle

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Circle

Use Circle to create a circle.

To draw a circle,

1	If desired, choose a fill color and fill pattern from the tool palette.

2	Choose Circle from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Circle from the Paint menu.

or... Click [image] in the tool palette, then hold down the Shift key while drawing.

3	Drag the pointer to begin the circle.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the circle.

See Also

Attributes

Bitmap Tool Palette

Ellipse

Tool Palette


Circular Arc

Draw, Circular Arc

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Circular Arc

Use Circular Arc to create a circular arc.

To create a circular arc,

1	Choose Circular Arc from the Draw menu, or if you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose Circular Arc from the Paint menu.

or... Click [image] in the tool palette , then hold down the Shift key while drawing.

2	Click where the arc should begin.

3	Drag to where the arc should end.

4	Move the pointer to create the arc between the two points.

5	Click to complete the arc.

See Also

Attributes

Bézier Curve

Curve

Elliptical Arc


Control-menu Box (def.)
 Control-menu box

Control-menu boxes are located in the title bar and contain the Control-menu.  The options in the Control-menu vary according to whether you are in an application window or a document window.

Restore

Move

Size

Minimize

Maximize

Close

Switch To (available in the application window)

Next (available in the document window)


Restore

Use Restore to restore the application or drawing window to its previous size and position.

To restore a window,

1	Click the double-arrow Restore button on the title bar.

or... Choose Restore from the Control-menu.

See Also

Control-menu box


Move

Use Move to relocate a window on the screen.

To move a window,

1	Drag the title bar to the new location.

or... Activate the window you want to move, then choose Move from the Control-menu.  Use the arrow keys to move the window to a new location, then press Enter.

See Also

Control-menu box


Size

Use Size to modify the size of a window.

To size a window,

1	Place the pointer on the window border (the pointer becomes a double arrow), then drag the pointer to the size you want.

or... Activate the window you want to size, then choose Size from the Control-menu .  Use the arrow keys until the outline of the window is the size you want, then press Enter.

See Also

Control-menu box


Maximize

Use Maximize to enlarge a window to full size.

To maximize the window,

1	Click the Maximize button (the up-arrow button on the title bar).

or... Double-click the title bar of the window you want to maximize.  Double-click again to restore it to its previous size (double-clicking will not minimize to an icon).

or... Activate the window you want to maximize, then choose Maximize from the Control-menu.

See Also

Control-menu box


Minimize

Use Minimize to reduce a window to an icon.

To minimize a window to an icon,

1	Click the Minimize button (the down-arrow button on the application title bar).

or... Activate the window you want to minimize, then choose Minimize from the Control-menu.

See Also

Control-menu box


Close (Control-menu)
Close

Use Close to close a drawing window or to exit an application.

To close a document window only,

1	Choose Close from the Control-menu.

2	Choose Yes to save changes and close the window.

To close WP Presentations,

1	Choose Close from the Control-menu.

2	Choose Yes to save changes, close all drawing windows, then exit WP Presentations.

See Also

Control-menu box


Switch To

Use Switch To to activate other applications without exiting WP Presentations.

To switch to another application,

1	Choose Switch To from the Control-menu.

2	Select the application you want to activate, then choose Switch To.

See Also

Control-menu box


Next

Use Next to scroll through open drawing windows.

To scroll through other open document windows,

1	Choose Next from the Control-menu.

See Also

Control-menu box


Status Area

Use the status area at the bottom of the screen to check the status of the document you are currently working on.

Basic Help Prompts

Active Tool

Current Template

Slide Number

Slide View


Active Tool

The name of the tool selected in the tool palette.


Basic Help Prompts

Helps for using each of the tools.


Current Template

The title of the current template.


Slide View

The current slide view (Editor, List, Sorter, or Outliner).


Slide Number

The number of the current slide in a slide show.


Application Window

The application window is the area in which all WP Presentations activities take place.

To learn more about the parts of an application window,

1	Move the pointer to the graphic above until the pointer becomes a hand [image], then click.

2	Click the hand pointer on a particular part of the dialog box for information.


Document Window

The document window is the window on your screen where you create a drawing, chart, or slide show.  You can open as many as nine document windows.

To view more than one open document,

1	Choose Tile or Cascade from the Window menu.

See Also

Cascade

Tile


Menus

Menu titles and commands change, depending on whether you are working on a bitmap image, chart, slide show, or using Help.

Choose from the following to see its menu options:

Bitmap Menus

Chart Menus

Help Menu

Slide Show Menus

To initiate a feature or execute an option from a menu,

1	Choose the menu title you want from the menu bar.

2	Choose the option or feature you want.


Bitmap Menus

Bitmap menu titles appear on the menu bar when you are working on a bitmap:

File    Edit    View    Paint    Text    Attributes    Window    Help

See Also

Chart Menus

Menus

Slide Show Menus


Chart Menus

Chart menu titles appear on the menu bar when you are working on a chart:

File    Edit    View    Chart    Text    Data    Options    Window    Help

See Also

Bitmap Menus

Menus

Slide Show Menus


Slide Show Menus

Slide Show menu titles appear on the menu bar when you are working on a slide show:

File    Edit    View    Arrange    Draw    Text    Attributes    Slide    Template    Window    Help

See Also

Bitmap Menus

Chart Menus

Menus


Menu Bar

The horizontal menu bar lists menus and is directly beneath the application title bar.  Lists of features related to each menu title display when you click the menu titles.

A menu option followed by no markings (except for a shortcut key) starts an action.

A menu option followed by an ellipsis opens a dialog box or provides additional information about the option.

A menu option followed by an arrow opens a cascading menu.


Exit

Use Exit to quit the WP Presentations application.

To save changes and exit WP Presentations,

1	Choose Exit from the File menu.

2	Choose Yes to save changes, then choose Close.

or... If the document has not been saved, specify the drive, directory, and filename in the Save As text box, then choose Save.

See Also

Clear

Save


 Template Pop-up List

Use the Template Pop-up List button to select a template from the current master.  If you are editing a template master, you can also use the Template Pop-up List to link one template to another.


 Slide Editor Button

A button that moves you quickly to the slide edit view.


 Slide Show Outliner Button

A button that lets you create a slide show in outline form.


 Slide List Button

A button that displays an overview list of the slides in your slide show.


 Slide Sorter Button

A button that displays an overview of your slide show and can easily change the order of the slides.


 Slide Scroll Bar

A scroll bar at the bottom of the application window that lets you scroll through slides.  The Slide Scroll Bar contains a scroll arrow at both ends and a slider box that moves in the Slider, corresponding to the display position within a slide show.


Window Border

The outside border of an application window or a tiled or cascaded drawing window.  Drag the borders to size a window.


Window Menu

Use the Window menu options to manage open windows:

Cascade    Tile    Slide Show


Chart Window Menu

Use the Window menu options to manage open windows while creating or editing a chart:

Cascade     Tile


Cascade

Window, Cascade

Draw, Bitmap, Window, Cascade

Draw, Chart, Window, Cascade

Use Cascade to view as many as nine open windows at the same time.  Cascade overlaps the windows.

To cascade open windows,

1	Choose Cascade from the Window menu.

See Also

Tile


Tile

Window, Tile

Draw, Bitmap, Window, Tile

Draw, Chart, Window, Tile

Use Tile to view as many as nine open windows at the same time.  Tile places the windows side by side.

To tile open windows,

1	Choose Tile from the Window menu.

See Also

Cascade


Window Slide Show

Window, Slide Show

Use Slide Show to switch between open documents.

To switch between documents,

1	Choose the name of the document you want to switch to from the Window menu.

See Also

Cascade

Tile


Dialog Box

A dialog box displays options, warnings, or messages.  Dialog boxes also provide ways for you to respond.

To learn more about the parts of a dialog box,

1	Move the pointer on the graphic above until the pointer becomes a hand [image].

2	Click the hand pointer on a particular part of the dialog box for information.


WP Presentations Icons

Choose any icon in WP Presentations for more information.

To get information from any button icon in Help,

1	Click the icon.

or... Press Tab until the icon is highlighted, then press Enter.

2	Click anywhere outside the pop-up to make it disappear.

or...Press Enter again to make the pop-up disappear.


Help Menu

Use Help menu options to get information about WP Presentations features:

Contents

Search for Help On

How Do I

QuickTutors

About WP Presentations


Search for Help On

Choose Search for Help On to find a Help topic by using a feature name or keyword as a search term.


QuickTutors

Choose QuickTutors for brief explanations and examples of WP Presentations features.


Edit Menu

Use the options on the Edit menu to modify text or graphics.

Undo

Redo

Delete

Cut

Copy

Paste

Paste Special

Links

Insert Object

Edit

Rotate

Duplicate

Select

Slide Show

Templates

Gallery

Go to


Undo

Edit, Undo

Draw, Bitmap, Edit, Undo

Use Undo to reverse your most recent change in a drawing or bitmap.

To undo your last change,

1	Choose Undo from the Edit menu.

See Also

Cut

Edit a Bitmap

Erase

Redo


Redo

Edit , Redo

Use Redo to reverse the action of Undo.

To use Redo,

1	Choose Redo from the Edit menu.

See Also

Undo


Delete

Edit , Delete

Draw, Chart, Edit, Delete

Use Delete to remove an item from a drawing window or a text chart.

To delete an item,

1	Select the item, then choose Delete from the Edit menu.

See Also

Undo


Cut

Edit, Cut

Draw, Bitmap, Edit, Cut

Draw, Chart, Edit, Cut

Use Cut to remove an item from your document to the Clipboard so that you can paste it in another location or file.

To cut an item,

1	Select the item you want to cut.

or... If you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose [image] from the bitmap tool palette (you can also choose Select Area from the Edit menu), then drag the pointer to select the area you want to cut.

2	Choose Cut from the Edit menu.

3	Choose Paste to transfer the item from the Clipboard to the drawing window.

See Also

Copy

Paste


 Hint

The item remains on the Clipboard until you use Cut or Copy to replace it with another item, or until you exit Windows.


Copy

Edit, Copy

Draw, Bitmap, Edit, Copy

Draw, Chart, Edit, Copy

Use Copy to place an item on the Clipboard without removing it from your document.  You can then paste the item in another location or file.

To copy an item,

1	Select the item you want to copy.

or... If you are in the Bitmap Editor, choose [image] from the bitmap tool palette (or choose Select Area from the Edit menu), then drag the pointer to select the area you want to copy.

2	Choose Copy from the Edit menu.

3	Choose Paste to transfer the item from the Clipboard to the drawing window.

See Also

Cut

Paste


Paste

Edit, Paste

Draw, Bitmap, Edit, Paste

Draw, Chart, Edit, Paste

Use Paste to place an item from the Clipboard into the current drawing window or text chart.

To paste,

1	Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

See Also

Copy

Cut


 Hint

In the drawing window, the object appears in its original position.

In the Chart Editor, place the cursor where you want the text to appear.

In the Bitmap Editor, the object can be moved after you Paste it; however, once you deselect it, you must use Select Area to move it again.


Links

Edit, Links

Use Links to display and edit the list of OLE links embedded in your slide show.

To add a new link to a slide show,

1	Choose Add Link from the Links dialog box.

2	Specify the source file for the link in the text box.

3	Specify the destination file, usually the current slide show filename.

To edit slide show links,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the link you want to edit.

3	Choose Edit.

To delete an existing link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the link you want to delete.

3	Choose Delete, then choose Yes.

See Also

Insert Object

Paste Special


 Hint

Every time you change the source file, a corresponding change is made to the destination file.


 Hint

The destination file is not deleted, but the files are no longer connected.  Changes to the source file will not affect the destination file.


Paste Special

Edit, Paste Special

Use Paste Special to link items such as graphics, text, spreadsheets, and sound clips in a drawing window or another application.

To link objects,

1	Create an item, or open the WP Presentations slide show that contains the item you want to link.

2	Select the item you want to link, then choose Copy from the Edit menu.

3	Open or switch to the document into which you want to link the item.

4	Place the insertion point where you want to paste the item if you are linking the item to a document in a word processing application.

or... The item will appear in the upper-left corner of the document if you are linking the item to a document in a drawing application.

5	Choose Paste Link from the Edit menu in the client application.

6	Save the destination document.

To edit a linked item,

1	Double-click the item to open the application where you created it.

2	Edit the item.

3	Choose Save from the File menu.

See Also

Insert Object


 Hint

The WP Presentations slide show (the source document) now contains the item and a link to the other document.


Insert Object

Edit, Insert Object

Use Insert Object to embed an object created in another application in the current slide.

To insert an object,

1	Choose Insert Object from the Edit menu.

2	Choose the type of object from the Object Type list, then choose OK.

3	Create the object you want to insert.

or... Open the file containing the object you want to insert.

4	Choose Update from the File menu in the application window.

5	Choose Exit & Return to OLE Object # from the File menu in the application window.

6	Move and size the object.

See Also

Links

Paste Special


Duplicate

Edit, Duplicate

Use Duplicate to duplicate an item in the current drawing window.  If you want to copy an item to another drawing window, you must use Copy.

To duplicate an item,

1	Select the item you want to duplicate.

2	Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu.

3	Select and drag the item to the desired location.

See Also

Copy


 Select

Edit, Select

Use Select to highlight an item or several items for editing.  Options on the Select cascading menu let you select one item, all items, or items that are alike.

To select an item,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.

or... Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose Item.

or... Press the right mouse button, then choose Select from the Pop-up Menu.

2	Click the item you want to select.

To select more than one item,

1	Press Shift and click the remaining items you want to select.

To select text,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette, then double-click the portion of the text you want to edit.

or... Choose Select from the Edit menu, choose Item, then double-click the desired text.

or... Place the pointer on the text, press the right mouse button, then choose Edit Text from the Pop-up Menu.

See Also

Select All

Select Item

Select Like


Select Item

Edit, Select , Item

Use Select Item to choose the Select Tool.

To use Select Item,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.

or... Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose Item.

or... Press the right mouse button, then choose Select from the Pop-up Menu.

2	Click the item you want to select.

or... Drag an area to select all items in that area.

See Also

Pop-up Menu

Select All

Select Like


 Select All

Edit, Select, All

Use Select All to select all items in the current drawing window.

To select all items,

1	Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose All.

or... Press the right mouse button, then choose Select All from the Pop-up Menu.

See Also

Pop-up Menu

Select Item

Select Like


Select Like

Edit, Select, Like

Use Select Like to select all objects in a drawing that are similar.

To select similar objects,

1	Select an object.

2	Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose Like.

See Also

Select All

Select Item


 Hint

For example, if an arrow is selected when you choose Select Like, WP Presentations selects all other arrows in the drawing, whether or not they are curved or straight.


Rotate

Edit, Rotate

Use Rotate to turn a selected item in any direction.

To rotate an object using the Edit menu,

1	Select the object.

2	Choose Rotate from the Edit menu.

3	Drag one of the corner rotation handles in the direction you want to rotate the object.

To rotate an object using the Pop-up Menu,

1	Place the pointer on the object you want to rotate and press the right mouse button to display the Pop-up Menu.

2	Choose Rotate.

3	Place the pointer on a corner rotation handle and press the right mouse button.

4	Specify the number of Degrees you want the object to rotate.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Pop-up Menu

Skew

Stretch and Size Objects


 Hint

You can change the way an object rotates by dragging its rotation axis ( [image]) away from the center of the object.


Skew

Edit, Rotate

Use Skew to slant a selected item horizontally or vertically.

To skew an object using the Edit menu,

1	Select the item you want to skew.

2	Choose Rotate from the Edit menu.

3	Drag the top or bottom handles to skew the item horizontally.

or... Drag the left or right side handle to skew the item vertically.

To skew an object using the Pop-up Menu,

1	Place the pointer on the object you want to rotate and press the right mouse button to display the Pop-up Menu.

2	Choose Rotate.

3	Place the pointer on a side handle and press the right mouse button.

4	Specify how much you want the object skewed in the Percent of Width text box.

5	Select Around Center if you want the object to skew around its center.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Pop-up Menu

Rotate

Stretch and Size Objects


Stretch and Size Objects

Use Stretch to extend a selected item horizontally or vertically, and use Size to make a selected item larger or smaller.

To stretch an object,

1	Select the object you want to stretch.

2	Place the pointer on a side handle and press the right mouse button.

3	Specify how much you want the object stretched in the Multiplier text box.

4	Select Around Center if you want the object to stretch from its center.

5	Choose OK.

To size an object,

1	Select the object you want to size.

2	Place the pointer on a corner handle and press the right mouse button.

3	Specify how much larger or smaller you want the object in the Multiplier text box.

4	Select Around Center if you want to size the object from its center.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Rotate

Skew


Edit

Edit, Edit

Use Edit to modify text, objects, figures, charts, or bitmap images.

To modify an item,

1	Select the item you want to modify.

2	To edit a bitmap, choose Edit Bitmap from the Edit menu.

or... To edit a chart, choose Edit Chart from the Edit menu.

or... To edit a figure, choose Edit Figure from the Edit menu.

or... To edit an object, choose Edit Points from the Edit menu.

or... To edit an OLE object, choose Edit OLE from the Edit menu.

or... To edit text, choose Edit Text from the Edit menu.

See Also

Edit a Figure

Edit a Bitmap

Edit a Chart

Edit an Object

Edit Menu

Edit Text

Select


Slide Show

Edit, Slide Show

Use Slide Show to access the current slide show after editing a template.

To return to an opened slide show after editing a template,

1	Click Return to Slide Show [image].  (You can also choose Slide Show from the Edit menu.)

See Also

Templates


Templates

Edit, Templates

Use Templates to open a template window where you can create, edit, delete, or link templates.

To open a template window,

1	Choose Templates from the Edit menu.

2	Choose OK to open the Template Editor.

3	Edit the current template.

or... If you want to create a new set of templates, choose Clear from the File menu, choose Master, then choose OK to clear the current set of templates.

4	Click Return to Slide Show [image] to close the Template Editor and return to your slide show.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the Edit menu.)

See Also

Add Template

Delete Template

Edit a Template

Link

Name Template


Edit Gallery

Edit, Gallery

Use Gallery to create a new category in a gallery.  Galleries display thumbnail sketches of slides arranged in categories such as Animals or Pie Charts.

To link a new category to a gallery,

1	Create or retrieve the slide show you want to link as a category file, ensuring titles are assigned to each slide.

or... Use the Template Editor to create new Template Master categories.

2	Choose Save As from the File menu.

3	Specify the directory where your gallery files are stored, then specify a filename for the slide show, ensuring you use the SHW 2.0 format.

4	Choose Save.

5	Choose Close from the File menu.

6	Choose Open from the File menu, specify the gallery file where you want to add the category (FIGURGAL.SHW for the Figure Gallery, for instance), then choose Open.

To create a cover slide for the new category,

1	Use the Slide Scroll Bar at the bottom of the screen to add the cover slide where you want it.

2	Choose Add Slide from the Slide menu and type 1 in the Number of Slides text box.

3	Create or retrieve a graphic that will represent the slide show you are linking to the gallery.

4	Choose Title from the Slide menu and give the cover slide a title, then choose OK.

5	Choose Save from the File menu to save the gallery with the cover slide.

To link your slide show file to the cover slide,

1	Choose Gallery from the Edit menu.

2	Specify the filename of the slide show you want linked to the slide, then choose OK.

3	Choose Save from the File menu to save the edited gallery.

See Also

Add Slide

Chart Gallery

Drawing/Slide Shows

Figure Gallery

Master Gallery

Open File

Save As

Slide Title


Go To

Edit, Go To

Use Go To to open a specific slide from the current slide show.

To go to a specified slide,

1	Choose Go To from the Edit menu.

2	Specify the number of the slide you want to open.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Go To Cell

Slide Sorter


Preferences: Environment

File, Preferences, Environment

Use Environment to modify the operating environment of WP Presentations..

To access Environment,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Environment [image].

2	Choose the language you want for menus, dialog boxes, help prompts, and messages from the Interface pop-up list.

3	Select Use WP Presentations Quick List if you want to use the default Quick List.

4	Select or deselect any of the other Environment options.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

Choose from the following Environment options for more information:

Beep On

Default Document Type

Startup View

Default Font

Save Slide List Layout on Exit

Language

See Also

Preferences


Beep Options
Beep On

File, Preferences, Environment, Beep On

Use Beep On to have your computer notify you when you get an error message, or when a search has failed.

To use Beep On,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Environment [image].

2	Select or deselect options in the Beep On group box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Beep On Error

Beep On Search Failure

Environment


Beep On Error

File, Preferences, Environment, Beep On Error

Use Beep on Error to have your computer beep when an error dialog box appears.

To access the Beep On Error option,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Environment [image].

2	Select Error.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Beep On

Beep On Search Failure


Beep On Search Failure

File, Preferences, Environment, Beep On Search Failure

Use Beep On Search Failure to have your computer notify you when a search fails.

To access the Beep On Search Failure option,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Environment [image].

2	Select Search Failure.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Beep On

Beep On Error


Default Document Type

File, Preferences, Environment, Default Document Type

Use Default Document Type to choose a drawing (.wpg file) or slide show as the default document.

To choose a default document type,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Environment [image].

2	Select Drawing.

or... Select Slide Show, then choose an option from the Startup View pop-up list.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

New

Startup View


Startup View

File, Preferences, Environment, Startup View

Use Startup View to set the default view to a Slide, Outline, or List.

To change the default document,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Environment [image].

2	Select an option from the Startup View pop-up list.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Environment

Preferences


Default Font

File, Preferences, Environment, Default Font

Use Default Font to set the default font for all new documents.

To set the default font,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Environment [image].

2	Choose Font.

3	Select a font and point size.

4	Choose OK twice, then choose Close.

See Also

Font


Language

File, Preferences, Language

Use Language to select a language module to use in entering and editing text.

At least one additional language module must be installed in order to use this feature.  You can purchase language modules separately.

To change the language setting,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Language [image].

2	Choose a language code from the Language list box.

or... Specify a language in the Other text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Environment

Preferences


 Hint

Only languages from installed language modules appear in the pop-up list.  See the Reference manual for a list of language codes.


Save Slide List Layout on Exit

File, Preferences, Environment, Save Slide List Layout on Exit

Use Save Slide List Layout on Exit to save your slide list layout each time you exit.

To save your slide list layout each time you exit the Slide List,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click Environment [image].

2	Select Save Slide List Layout on Exit.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Slide Show List


File Menu

Use the options on the File menu to manage documents.

New

Open

Insert File

Close

Save

Save As

File Manager

Convert to Slide Show

Page Layout

Adjust Image

Preferences

Print

Print Setup

Acquire Image

Image Source Setup

Clear

Exit


New

File, New

Use New to open a blank drawing window for a drawing or slide show.

To open a new document window,

1	Choose New from the File menu.

2	Choose Slide Show to create a slide show (.shw file).

or... Choose Drawing to create a drawing (.wpg file).

See Also

Default Document Type

Insert File

Open File


 Hint

If you have enough memory available, you can open up to nine drawing windows at the same time.


File Manager

File, File Manager

Use File Manager for extensive file-handling capabilities.  File Manager lets you retrieve, delete, print, copy, and view files without opening them.

To run File Manager,

1	Choose File Manager from the File menu while in WP Presentations.

or... Choose WordPerfect File Manager from Windows' Program Manager.


Clear

File, Clear

Use Clear to erase items in the current slide or slide show without opening a new window.  In the Template Editor, use Clear to erase items in the current template or master.

You must be in the drawing window or Template Editor to use this feature.

To clear your screen,

1	Choose Clear from the File menu.

2	In the drawing window, select Slide Show to clear your entire slide show.

or... Select Slide # to clear the current slide only.

3	In the Template Editor, select Master to clear your entire master.

or... Select Current Template to clear the current template only.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Bitmap Clear

Chart Clear Data

Close

Exit


Convert to Slide Show

File, Convert to Slide Show

Use Convert to Slide Show to convert a single graphic image into a slide.

To convert a graphic to a slide,

1	Choose Open from the File menu.

2	Type the filename and pathname in the Filename text box.

or... Select the file you want from the Files list box.

3	Choose Open.

4	Choose Convert to Slide Show from the File menu.

See Also

Slide Show


Close

File, Close

Use Close to exit a document without exiting WP Presentations.

To close a document that has not been modified,

1	Choose Close from the File menu.

To close a document that is new or has been modified,

1	Choose Close from the File menu.

2	Choose Yes to save the changes and close the document.

or... Choose No to close the document without saving the changes.

See Also

Clear

Exit

File

Save

Save As


 Hint

If you are saving the document for the first time, the Save As dialog box appears.  Specify the drive and directory where you want the file to be saved, type a filename in the Save As text box, then choose Save.  WP Presentations saves the changes and closes the document.


Save

File, Save

Use Save to save new drawings or slide shows or to save modified drawings or slide shows.

To save a new document,

1	Choose Save from the File menu.

2	Choose a format from the Format pop-up list if you want to save the document in a format other than WP Presentations.

3	Select a drive and directory from the Directories list box.

4	Type a filename in the Save As text box.

5	Choose Save.

To save changes to a modified document,

1	Choose Save from the File menu.

See Also

Close

Exit

Save As


Adjust Image

File, Adjust Image

Use Adjust Image to modify the brightness, contrast, and warmth of the colors in your slide show.

To adjust image colors,

1	Choose Adjust Image from the File menu.

2	Specify the Brightness amount.

3	Specify the Contrast amount.

4	Specify the Warmth amount.

5	Use the Preview button to view your adjustments.

6	Use the Reset button to cancel your adjustments.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Acquire Image

Color Attributes

Image Source Setup


 Hint

Higher numbers give lighter colors, while lower numbers give darker colors.  For example, zero results in a black screen while 100 results in a white screen.


 Hint

Higher numbers give less contrast, while lower numbers give more contrast.  For example, zero results in bright colors in large blocks, while 100 results in bleached, gradient colors.


 Hint

Higher numbers add red to all colors and remove blue, while lower numbers add blue to all colors and remove red.  For example, zero results in a completely blue screen, while 100 results in a completely red screen.


Acquire Image

File, Acquire Image

Use Acquire Image to scan an image (photograph, drawing, etc.) directly into WP Presentations as a bitmap image.

You must have an image scanner with a TWAIN compatible driver.  Each scanner has different capabilities which will affect how you can use it.  Please refer to your image scanner manual for more information.

To acquire an image,

1	Choose Acquire Image from the File menu.

2	Drag to select the image portion you want to bring into WP Presentations.

3	Choose the Type of image from the Type pop-up  list.

4	Choose the path for the image.

5	Specify Brightness and Contrast levels and the Gray Scale you want.

6	Choose Final.

See Also

Adjust Image

Image Source Setup


Image Source Setup

File, Image Source Setup

Use Image Source Setup to select your image scanning device.

To set the image source,

1	Choose Image Source Setup from the File menu.

2	Highlight the image scanner you want in the Source list box and choose Select.

See Also

Acquire Image

Adjust Image


 Hint

Depending on the scanner you are using, the printer dialog box that appears when you select Image Source Setup will vary.  Choose the Help button in the dialog box for more information, or consult your scanner manual.


Open File

File, Open

Use Open to open as many as nine documents or windows in the same application.  Open opens a file you have saved.

To open a file that has been saved,

1	Choose Open from the File menu.

2	Type a filename in the Filename text box.

or... Click inside the Files list box, type the first few letters of the filename, and select the file you want to open.

3	Choose Open.

See Also

Filename Text Box

Files List

Insert File


Insert File

File, Insert File

Use Insert File to retrieve files (charts, bitmaps, text and figures) into the current slide show.

To retrieve and insert a document,

1	Choose Insert File from the File menu.

2	Type a filename to retrieve in the Filename text box.

or... Click inside the Files list box, type the first few letters of the filename, and select the file you want to open.

3	Choose Retrieve.

To retrieve and insert text,

1	Choose [image] and drag to define the insertion area, then choose Insert File from the File menu.

2	Follow steps 2 and 3 above.

To retrieve and insert a figure,

1	Choose [image] and drag to define the insertion area.

or... Click once to define a full-page figure area.

2	Select a figure category and choose Next Level.

or... Choose Import.

3	Select a figure and choose Retrieve.

See Also

Filename Text Box

Files List

Open File


Filename Text Box

Use the Filename Text Box to indicate the file you want to open or save.  If you are already in the directory where the file is located, type the filename in the Filename text box.  If the file is in a different directory, include the full pathname for the file (example: c:\wpwin\car.wpg), or choose a different directory from the Directories List or Quick List.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To use the Filename Text Box,

1	Type the filename in the Filename text box.

or... Include the full pathname if the file is in a different directory.

See Also

Directories List

Files List

Insert File

Open File

Quick List


Current Directory

Current Directory identifies the directory you are working in.  The name of the directory appears next to Current Dir.  When you save a file, it will be saved to this directory unless you specify another.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To use Current Directory,

1	Select a directory from the Directories list box.

See Also

Change Default Directory


Files List

Use the Files list box to alphabetically display the files you can select in the current directory.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To find a filename,

1	Use the scroll bar to the right of the Files list.

or... Click inside the Files list box and type the first few letters of the filename you are searching for.

As you begin typing the filename, the Name Search text box displays just above the Files list box, indicating the filename.  Highlight the file you want in the list box.

See Also

Filename Text Box


Change Default Directory

Use Change Default Directory to make the current directory the default directory.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To change your default directory,

1	Select the directory you want from the Directories list box.

2	Select Change Default Dir.

See Also

Current Directory

Location of Files


Quick List

Use the Quick List feature to define and list directories you use most frequently.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To use the Quick List feature,

1	Select the Quick List check box.

See Also

Add or Edit Quick List

Create Quick List


 Hint

The Directories list box changes to the Quick List box, which displays descriptive names for the Quick List directories.  When you select a Quick List directory, the files in the Quick List appear in the Files list box.


Directories List

Use the Directories List to change directories.  Files in the Current Directory appear in the Files list box.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To access your list of directories,

1	Deselect Quick List to display the Directories list if the Quick List is currently displayed.

See Also

Change Default Directory

Current Directory

Quick List


Create Quick List

Quick List, Edit Quick List, Add

Use Create Quick List to create a Quick List to identify and list the directories you use most frequently.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To create a Quick List,

1	Select the Quick List check box, then choose Edit Quick List.

2	Choose Add.

3	Type the pathname for your directory in the Directory/Filename text box.

4	Type the descriptive name (up to 79 characters) in the Descriptive Name text box.

5	Choose OK twice.

See Also

Add or Edit Quick List


File Info

The File Info line identifies the number of bytes in a file, and the date and time the file was created or edited.  The File Info line will be blank until a filename has been identified.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To access File Info,

1	Select a filename from the Files list box.


View File

Use View File to look at the contents of a file without opening it.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

You can scroll through the file while viewing it, but you cannot edit it.  You do not have to close the View window before viewing another file.

To view a file,

1	Select the file you want from the Files list box.

2	Choose View.

3	To view another file, select it from the Files list box.

See Also

Print View


Add or Edit Quick List

Quick List, Edit Quick List

Use Add or Edit Quick List to delete, modify, and add items to your Quick List of directories.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To modify your Quick List,

1	Select Quick List.

2	Choose Edit Quick List.

3	Choose Add to add another item to the list, then type the Directory/Filename and the Descriptive name.

or... Select the Quick List you want to modify, then choose Edit.

4	To remove a directory from the Quick List, highlight the directory, choose Delete, then choose Yes.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Quick List

Directories List

Quick List


 Hint

You can use the folder icons to select directories.


File Options

Use File Options to delete, copy, move/rename, or to search for files by filename or word content.  Use File Manager for more extensive file handling capabilities.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To use the Options feature,

1	Choose the option you want from the Options pop-up list.

See Also

Copy File

Delete File

File Manager

Find Files

Move/Rename File


Delete File

Options, Delete

Use Delete to delete one file or a group of files.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To delete a file,

1	Select the filename you want to delete and choose Delete from the Options pop-up list.

2	Use the DOS wildcard characters "*" and "?" to delete a group of files.

or... Type a filename in the File to Delete text box if you did not select a file in the dialog box before choosing the Delete option.

3	Choose Delete.

See Also

Copy File

Find Files

Move/Rename File


 Hint

For example, to delete all files with a .feb extension, type *.feb for the filename in the text box.


Copy File

Options, Copy

Use Copy to copy a file to any drive, directory, or disk.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

To copy a file,

1	Select the file you want and choose Copy from Options pop-up list.

or... Type the filename you want to copy in the From text box if you did not select a file in the dialog box before choosing the Copy option.  Include the full pathname if the file is in another directory.

2	Type a name in the To text box.

3	Choose Copy.

See Also

Find Files

Move/Rename File


Move/Rename File

Options, Move/Rename

Use Move/Rename to rename a file, or to move a file to any drive, directory, or disk.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

Move will not create a destination directory, nor will it move an entire directory or subdirectory.  Wildcards cannot be used with the Move option.

To move or rename a file,

1	Select the file you want in the Files list box, and choose Move/Rename from Options pop-up list.

or... Type the filename you want to move or rename in the From text box if you did not select a file in the dialog box before choosing the Move/Rename option.  Include the pathname if the file is in another directory.

2	Type a name in the To text box.

3	Choose Move.

See Also

Copy File


Find Files

Options, Find, Find Files

Use Find to search for specific files.  You can find files by filename or by word pattern.  Find will search any directory, subdirectory, or disk drive.  Use File Manager for more extensive file handling capabilities.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

This option only works in text files, not in graphic files that have text in them.

To find files,

1	Choose Find from the Options pop-up list.

2	To find files by filename pattern, type the filename pattern, or type the entire filename, in the File Pattern text box.

3	To find files by word pattern, type a word pattern in the Words text box.

4	Select Words Must Be Next to Each Other to limit your search to consecutive words.

5	Select WordPerfect Documents Only to limit Find Files to WordPerfect files.

6	Tell WP Presentations where to search for the filename pattern by choosing one of the options in the Search group box.

7	Choose Find.

8	Choose View to display selected files without opening them.

9	Select the file you want, then choose Open.

See Also

File Manager

Search Results

View File


Search Results

Options, Find, Search Results

The Search Results dialog box displays the files found that match the filename or word pattern you specified in Find Files.  Use Search Results to view, retrieve, delete, move, or copy specific files.

To use Search Results,

1	Choose View to display found files without opening them.

2	Choose Open to retrieve files.

3	Choose Options to delete, copy, or move a selected file.

4	Choose Find Files to continue searching.

See Also

Copy File

Delete File

Find Files

Move/Rename File


Searching Message Box

Options, Find Files

The Searching message box, which appears when you begin a search using Find Files, identifies the directory or file being searched, and the number of files found during the search.

You may cancel the search at any time.  The files, which match the filename or word pattern you specified, appear automatically in the Search Results list box.


QuickFinder Index

Options, Find Files

Use the QuickFinder Index to search for specific words or phrases in previously indexed files.  This feature appears in many different dialog boxes.

The QuickFinder can only be used to find words in a list of files you have previously created as an index.  If you want to search network indexes, talk to your network administrator.

To search indexed files using a specific word or phrase,

1	Choose Find Files from the Options pop-up list.

2	Select the QuickFinder Index, then choose the index you want to search from the pop-up list.

3	To find files by word pattern, type a word pattern in the Words text box.

4	Select the Words Must Be Next to Each Other check box to limit your search to consecutive words.

5	Select the WordPerfect Documents Only check box to limit Find Files to WordPerfect files.

6	Choose Find.

See Also

Find Files

Search Results


 Hint

Find Files will accept the DOS wildcard characters "*" and "?".  For example, a filename pattern might be ?.ltr or jones.*.


Page Layout

File, Page Layout

Use Page Layout to set the page appearance for the current document.

To change page settings,

1	Choose Page Layout from the File menu.

2	Make changes in Page Size, Poster, Color Options, or Margins.

3	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Page Layout options for more information:

Page Size

Poster

Page Color

Margins

See Also

Preferences


 Hint

If you want to change Page Layout options for all new documents, choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Page Layout.  Make your changes and choose OK, then choose Yes in the Update Page Settings dialog box.  Choose Close.


Page Color

File, Page Layout, Color Options

Use Color Options to select a background color for the current document.

Choose from the following Page Color options for more information:

Solid Page Color

Gradient Page Color

See Also

Preferences


Solid Page Color

File, Page Layout, Solid Page Color

Use Solid Page Color to select a solid background color for the current document.

To select a solid page color,

1	Choose Page Layout from the File menu.

2	Select Solid for the Page Color.

3	Select a page color from the color palette in the Color Options group box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Gradient Page Color

Preferences


Gradient Page Color

File, Page Layout, Gradient Page Color

Use Gradient Page Color to select a gradient background color for the current document.

To select a gradient page color,

1	Choose Page Layout from the File menu.

2	Select Gradient for the Page Color.

3	Select a Center Color and an Outer Color from the color palettes in the Color Options group box.

4	Choose a gradient Type, specify the Angle the colors will slant on, and position your colors along the X and Y axes.

5	Select Auto-Step Blending or specify the amount of Fixed Blending you want.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Preferences

Solid Page Color

X Center

Y Center


X Center

File, Page Layout, Gradient Page Color, X Center

Use X Center to position a gradient page color on the screen in the current document.

To set the X Center,

1	Choose Page Layout from the File menu.

2	Select Gradient for the Page Color.

3	In the X Center box, type a value from 0 to 100.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Gradient Page Color

Preferences

Y Center


 Hint

The value represents (in percentage) how far your pattern is displaced from the left of the screen (0 for the left edge, 50 for mid-screen, 100 for the right edge, and so on).


Y Center

File, Page Layout , Gradient Page Color, Y Center

Use Y Center to position a gradient page color on the screen in the current document.

To set the Y Center,

1	Choose Page Layout from the File menu.

2	Select Gradient for the Page Color.

3	In the Y Center box, type a value from 0 to 100.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Gradient Page Color

Preferences

X Center


 Hint

The value represents (in percentage) how far your pattern is displaced from the top of the screen (0 for the top edge, 50 for mid-screen, 100 for the bottom edge, and so on).


Page Size

File, Page Layout, Page Size

Use Page Size to select the page size for the current document.

To set the page size,

1	Choose Page Layout from the File menu.

2	Choose an option from the Size pop-up list.

or... Specify a value in one or both Width and Height text boxes.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Margins

Page Color

Preferences


Poster

File, Page Layout, Poster

Use Poster to enlarge your current drawing, text, or chart and print it across several pages.  You can only print individual drawings as posters; if you open or create a slide show, Poster will be dimmed.

To make a poster,

1	Choose New from the File menu, then choose Drawing.

or... Retrieve a drawing saved as a .WPG file.

2	Create your poster.

3	Choose Page Layout from the File Menu.

4	Choose Poster.

5	Click the Poster button and drag to specify how many pages across and down you want your poster to be.  The maximum size for a poster is 8 rows by 8 columns.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Open File

Page Size

Print


Margins

File, Page Layout, Margins

Use Margins to set the margins for the current document.

To set margins,

1	Choose Page Layout from the File menu.

2	Specify new margin settings in the Margins group box.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Page Size

Preferences


Preferences

File, Preferences

Use Preferences to change your default settings.

To access Preferences,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu.

2	Make any changes you want.

3	Choose Close.

Choose from the following Preferences options for more information:

  Location of Files

  Backup Settings

  Environment

  Display

  Print

  Keyboard

  Slide Show

  Page Layout

  Date Format

  Language


Preferences Backup

File, Preferences, Backup

Use Backup to select Timed Document Backup or Original Document Backup to save your files automatically and prevent loss in the event of power outages or machine failures.

To change backup settings,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Backup [image].

2	Select Timed Document Backup if you want each current document to be backed up at selected intervals.

or... Deselect Timed Document Backup if you do not want timed backups.

3	Indicate the number of minutes between backups if you select Timed Document Backup.

4	Select Original Document Backup if you want to save both the original and the replacement versions of the current slide show or drawing file.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Backup Files

Location of Files


Preferences Display

File, Preferences, Display

Use Display to determine how certain features appear and function for each new slide.

To set the display layout preferences,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Change any options you want.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

Choose from the following Display options for more information:

Display Ruler on Startup

Display Grid on Startup

Display Pointer Position

Display Selected Objects

Display Sculptured Dialog Boxes

Auto Select Drawn Item

Crosshair Pointer

Draft Mode

Hide Pointer While Drawing

Snap to Grid Point

Display Shortcut Keys

Display Last Open Filenames

Units of Measure

See Also

Preferences


 Hint

Any changes you make will affect every new slide show or drawing you create.


Display Sculptured Dialog Boxes

File, Preferences, Display, Display Sculptured Dialog Boxes

Use Display Sculptured Dialog Boxes to make dialog boxes appear three-dimensional.  This option applies only if you are using a color monitor.  Turning this option off speeds up the display of dialog boxes.

To display sculptured dialog boxes,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select the Display Sculptured Dialog Boxes option.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Preferences Display


Show Ruler on Startup
Display Ruler on Startup

File, Preferences, Display, Display Ruler on Startup

Use Display Ruler on Startup to display the Ruler each time you enter WP Presentations.

To display the Ruler in each new slide window,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select the Display Ruler on Startup option.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Preferences Display

Ruler


Show Grid on Startup
Display Grid on Startup

File, Preferences, Display, Display Grid on Startup

Use Display Grid on Startup to display the Grid each time you enter WP Presentations.

To display the grid in each new slide,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select the Display Grid on Startup option.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Grid

Preferences Display

Snap to Grid Point


Snap to Grid Point

File, Preferences, Display, Snap to Grid Point

Use Snap to Grid Point to automatically align created, modified, or moved items to grid points.  Selecting this option will turn on Snap to Grid Point each time you enter WP Presentations.

To turn on Snap to Grid Point,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select the Snap to Grid Point option.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Grid

Preferences Display

Snap to Grid


Crosshair Pointer

File, Preferences, Display, Crosshair Pointer

Use Crosshair Pointer to create, align, and size objects with precision.  A crosshair pointer replaces the pointer and displays as a plus sign that extends the length and width of the drawing window.

To turn the crosshair pointer on or off for all new documents,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select Crosshair Pointer.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Crosshair

Preferences Display

Ruler


Hide Pointer While Drawing

File, Preferences, Display, Hide Pointer While Drawing

Use Hide Pointer While Drawing to turn off the display of the pointer while you draw objects.

To hide the pointer while drawing,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select the Hide Pointer while Drawing option.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Preferences Display


Auto Select Drawn Item

File, Preferences, Display, Auto Select Drawn Item

Use Auto Select Drawn Item to determine whether items are selected as soon as you finish drawing them.

To have objects selected,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select the Auto Select Drawn Item option.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Preferences Display

Select

Select Item


Units of Measure

File, Preferences, Display, Units of Measure

Use Units of Measure to set the units used for displaying and entering values in dialog boxes and the units used in the status bar.

To set the units of measure,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Choose a unit of measure from the Display and Entry of Numbers pop-up list.

3	Choose a unit of measure from the Status Bar Display pop-up list.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Display Pointer Position

Preferences Display


Display Pointer Position

File, Preferences, Display, Display Pointer Position

Use Display Pointer Position to display the position of the pointer in all new documents.  The position display appears at the bottom right of the screen.

To display the pointer position,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select Display Pointer Position.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Position Display

Units of Measure


Display Selected Objects

File, Preferences, Display, Display Selected Objects

Use Display Selected Objects to display any objects currently selected.  A miniature version of the objects displays in the status box at the end of the tool palette.

To display selected objects in the status box,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select Display Selected Objects.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Select


Display Shortcut Keys

File, Preferences, Display, Display Shortcut Keys

Use Display Shortcut Keys to display keystrokes next to the feature names on the menus.

To display shortcut keys on the menus,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select Display Shortcut Keys.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Shortcut Keys


Display Last Open Filenames

File, Preferences, Display, Display Last Open Filenames

Use Display Last Open Filenames to display filenames of the last four files you opened.  The filenames are listed at the bottom of the File menu.

To display the names of the last four files you opened,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display [image].

2	Select Display Last Open Filenames.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

File Menu


Preferences Location of Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files

Use Location of Files to tell WP Presentations where to store and access your files.

To specify locations for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for each category in the appropriate text box.

3	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Location of Files options for more information:

Backup Files

Drawing/Slide Show Files

Master/Gallery Files

Figure/Clip Art Files

Sound Clip Files

Quick Files

Keyboard/Button Bar/Palette Files

Speller/Hyphenation Files

See Also

Backup

Select Directory


Backup Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files, Backup Files

Use Backup Files to specify where you want WP Presentations to place your timed backup files.

To specify the directory for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for your backup files in the Backup Files text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Backup

Select Directory


Drawing/Slide Show Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files, Drawing/Slide Shows

Use Drawing/Slide Shows to tell WP Presentations which directory to retrieve your drawing and slide show (*.shw) files from.

To specify the directory for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for your drawing and slide show files in the Drawing/Slide Shows text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Select Directory

Slide Show


Master/Gallery Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files, Masters/Galleries

Use Masters/Galleries to tell WP Presentations where you want your master (*.mst) and gallery files (*.shw) saved.

To specify the directory for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for your master and gallery files in the Masters/Galleries text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Master Gallery

Select Directory


Figure/Clip Art Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files, Figures/Clip Art

Use Figures/Clip Art to tell WP Presentations which directory to retrieve your figure and clip art files from.

To specify the directory for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for your figure and clip art files in the Figures/Clip Art text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Figure

Select Directory


Sound Clip Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files, Sound Clips

Use Sound Clips to tell WP Presentations where you want your sound files saved.

To specify the directory for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for your sound files in the Sound Clips text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Select Directory

Slide Sound


Quick Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files, Quick Files

Use Quick Files to tell WP Presentations where you want your quick files (*.pqw) saved.

To specify the directory for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for your quick files in the Quick Files text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Make Run-time

Select Directory


Keyboard/Button Bar/Palette Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files, Keyboards/Button Bars

Use Keyboards/Button Bars to tell WP Presentations where you want your keyboard (*.wwk), button bar (*.prb), and palette (*.prc) files saved.

To specify the directory for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for your keyboard and button bar files in the Keyboards/Button Bar/Palettes text box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Button Bar

Keyboard

Palettes

Select Directory


Speller/Hyphenation Files

File, Preferences, Location of Files, Speller/Hyphenation

Use Speller/Hyphenation to tell WP Presentations where you want your speller and hyphenation files saved.

To specify the directory for your files,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Location of Files [image].

2	Type the pathname for your speller and hyphenation files and your supplementary Speller/Hyphenation files in the Speller/Hyphenation text boxes.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Select Directory

Speller


Select Directory

Use Select Directory, which appears on several dialog boxes, to locate the directory where you want to store your files.

To name a directory for storing your files,

1	Click the folder icon [image].

2	Type the name of the directory you want in the Directory Name text box.

or... Select the directory you want from the Directories list box.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Preferences: Location of Files


Preferences Print

File, Preferences, Print

Use Preferences Print to change the default print options.

To set default print options,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Print [image].

2	Make the changes you want.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

Choose from the following Print options for more information:

Number of Copies

Print Options

See Also

Print

Print Document Options

Print Setup


Number of Copies

File, Preferences, Print, Number of Copies

Use the Number of Copies option to set the default number of copies you want to print.  Do not choose this option to change the number of copies occasionally.

To change the default number of copies,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Print [image].

2	Specify the number of copies you want to print as a default.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Print Options

Preferences Print


 Hint

For example, if you want to print five copies of each document every time you print, then change the default number to 5.


Print Options

File, Preferences, Print, Options

Use Options to set the default number of copies, binding offset, and color to black and white image adjustment, and to specify how your printed documents are generated.

To change the default print options,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Print [image].

2	Specify the default number of copies you want to print.

3	Specify the amount of space you want to leave on the left margin in the Binding Offset text box.

4	Choose WP Presentations or Printer in the Generated By pop-up list.

5	Select Adust Image to Print Black and White if you have a black and white printer.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Number of Copies

Preferences Print

Print Document Options


Preferences Slide Show

File, Preferences, Slide Show

Use Slide Show to set the number of slides per row that are shown in the Slide Sorter and the default master and template for all new slide shows.

To set slide show defaults,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Slide Show [image].

2	Type the number of slides you want the Slide Sorter to display per row in the Number of Slides per Row text box,.

3	Type the name of the default master file you want in the Default Master text box.

4	Choose the template you want from the Template pop-up list.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Master Gallery

Slide Sorter


Print

File, Print

Use Print to select print options and to print a drawing or slide show from the screen or disk.

You can use Print with the same Windows printer driver that you use with other Windows applications.  You must select a Windows printer before you can print in WP Presentations.

To print a document,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select the options you want for your print job.

3	Choose Print.

Choose from one of the following Help topics for more information:

Current Printer

Print Document Options

Number of Copies

Generated By

Binding Offset

Adjust Image to Print Black and White

Range

Document on Disk

Number of Notes per Page

Page Numbers

Paper Size/Margins

See Also

Print Setup

Print View


Print Current Printer

File, Print

Use Current Printer to display the selected printer.

You must select a Windows printer before you can print in WP Presentations.

To see the current printer,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

To select a different printer,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Choose Select from the Print dialog box.

3	Select the Printer you want to use from the Available Printers list box.

4	Choose Select to make this printer the current printer.

or... Choose Initial Font to select the font you want to use.

or... Choose Setup to select setup options.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Setup


Print Document Options

File, Print

Use the Print pop-up list in the Print dialog box to specify which documents, or what portion of the documents, you want to print.

To print a document,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Full Page

Current View

Slides

Slide List

Handouts

Speaker Notes

Document on Disk

Selected Objects

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print


Full Page

Prints the entire document.

How to Use It


Current View

Prints only what is currently shown on your screen.

How to Use It


Slides

Prints all or part of a slide show.

How to Use It


Slide List

Prints the title and options used for each slide in a slide show.

How to Use It


Handouts

Prints accompanying handouts for a slide show.

How to Use It


Speaker Notes

Prints thumbnail skitches with notes for each slide.

How to Use It


Document on Disk

Prints documents stored on disk, but not currently on the screen.

How to Use It


Selected Objects

Prints only the objects you select from within a group of objects.

How to Use It


Print Full Page

File, Print

Use Full Page to print your entire document.

To print a document,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Full Page from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Document Options

Print Number of Copies


Print Current View

File, Print

Use Current View to print your document as it is currently displayed on your screen.

To print the current view of a document,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Current View from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Zoom

Zoom Area

Zoom In

Zoom Out


Print Slides

File, Print

Use Slides to print all or part of a slide show.

To print a slide show,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Slides from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Print.

To print a portion of a slide show,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Slides from the Print pop-up list.

3	Deselect Full Range.

4	Specify the range of slides you want printed by typing the first slide number in the Start text box and the last number in the End text box.

or... Select all, even, or odd slides from the Pages pop-up list.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Handouts

Print Slide List

Print Speaker Notes


Print Slide List

File, Print

Use Slide List to print a listing of the title and options used for each slide in a slide show.

To print an entire slide list,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Slide List from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Print to print the entire slide list.

To print a portion of a slide list,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Slide List from the Print pop-up list.

3	Deselect Full Range.

4	Specify the range of slides you want printed by typing the first slide number in the Start text box and the last number in the End text box.

or... Select all, even, or odd slides from the Pages pop-up list.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Handouts

Print Slides

Print Speaker Notes


Print Handouts

File, Print

Use Handouts to print handouts of a slide show.

To print handouts,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Handouts from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Print.

To print a portion of the handouts,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Handouts from the Print pop-up list.

3	Deselect Full Range.

4	Specify the range of slides you want printed by typing the first slide number in the Start text box and the last number in the End text box.

or... Select all, even, or odd slides from the Pages pop-up list.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Page Numbers

Print Paper Size/Margins


Print Paper Size/Margins

File, Print

Use Paper Size/Margins to change the paper size and margins for Handouts and Speaker Notes.

To change the paper size and margins,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Handouts from the Print pop-up list.

or... Select Speaker Notes from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Paper Size/Margins.

4	Select the Paper Size from the Size pop-up list.

or... Type the width and height in the Width and Height text boxes.

5	Type the desired margin settings in the Margins text boxes.

6	Choose OK, then choose Print.

Choose from the following Paper Size/Margins options for more imformation:

Paper Size

Margins

See Also

Print

Print Handouts

Print Speaker Notes


Print Paper Size

File, Print

Use Paper Size to change the size and page orientation for Handouts or Speaker Notes.

To change the paper size and orientation,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Handouts from the Print pop-up list.

or... Select Speaker Notes from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Paper Size/Margins.

4	Select the size and page orientation from the Size pop-up list.

or... Type the width and height in the Width and Height text boxes.

5	Choose OK, then choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Handouts

Print Margins

Print Paper Size/Margins

Print Speaker Notes


Print Margins

File, Print

Use Margins to change the margins of Handouts and Speaker Notes.

To change the margins,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Handouts from the Print pop-up list.

or... Select Speaker Notes from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Paper Size/Margins.

4	Type the desired margin settings in the Margins text boxes.

5	Choose OK, then choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Handouts

Print Paper Size

Print Paper Size/Margins

Print Speaker Notes


Print Page Numbers

File, Print

Use Page Numbers to place new page numbers or change existing page numbers on Handouts or Speaker Notes.

To change the paper size and margins,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Handouts from the Print pop-up list.

or... Select Speaker Notes from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Page Numbers.

4	Choose a page number location from the Position pop-up list.

5	Choose OK, then choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Handouts

Print Speaker Notes


Print Speaker Notes

File, Print

Use Speaker Notes to print thumbnail sketches along with notes of each slide.

To print speaker notes,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Speaker Notes from the Print pop-up list.

3	Choose Print.

To print a portion of the speaker notes,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Speaker Notes from the Print pop-up list.

3	Deselect Full Range.

4	Specify the range of slides you want printed by typing the first slide number in the Start text box and the last number in the End text box.

or... Select all, even, or odd slides from the Pages pop-up list.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Number of Notes per Page

Print

Print Page Numbers

Print Paper Size/Margins


Print Number of Slides Per Page

File, Print

Use Number of Slides Per Page to determine the number of thumbnail sketches per page that appear on a handout.

To change the number of slides per page,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Handouts from the Print pop-up list.

3	Type the number of slides you want on each page in the Number of Slides per Page text box.

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Preferences Slide Show

Print

Print Handouts


Print Number of Notes Per Page

File, Print

Use Number of Notes Per Page to determine the number of thumbnail sketches and speaker notes that appear on each page.

To change the number of notes per page,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Speaker Notes from the Print pop-up list.

3	Type the number of thumbnail sketches and speaker notes you want on each page in the Number of Notes Per Page text box.

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Speaker Notes


Print Document on Disk

File, Print

Use Document on Disk to print documents that are not currently on the screen.

To print a document from floppy disk or hard disk,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Document on Disk.

3	Type the filename including the pathname in the Document on Disk text box.

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Print


Print Selected Objects

File, Print

Use Selected Objects to print objects you select in the drawing window.

To print selected objects,

1	Select the objects you want to print.

2	Choose Print from the File menu.

3	Select Selected Objects from the Print pop-up list.

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Range


Print Range

File, Print

Use the Range group box to specify the pages you want to print.  In drawing mode, the Range option is dimmed.

To print specific pages,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Deselect Full Range, then select the pages you want to print from the Pages pop-up list.

or... Type the range of pages you want printed by specifying the first page number in the Start text box and the last page number in the End text box.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Printer Setup


Print Number of Copies

File, Print

Use Number of Copies to print more than one copy of your document.

To print two or more copies of a document,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Specify the number of copies you want to print in the Number of Copies text box.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Number of Copies

Preferences Print

Print

Print Generated By


Print Generated By

File, Print

Use Generated By let your printer quickly qrocess multiple copy printings.

Your printer must have the capability to generate a print job in order to use this feature.

To use Generated By,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select WP Presentations from the Generated By pop-up list.

or... Select Printer from the Generated By pop-up list to let your printer create the multiple copies.

or... Select Network for network copies.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print

Print Number of Copies


 Hint

The printer will not collate multiple page documents.


Print Binding Offset

File, Print

Use Binding Offset to shift the items on a page away from the bound edge.

To determine the Binding Offset,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Type the distance for binding offset in the Binding Offset text box..

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print


 Hint

For example, 2" moves the contents of each page two inches from the bound edge or inside margin.


Adjust Image to Print Black and White

File, Print

Use Adjust Image to Print Black and White to adapt your colored drawing or slide for printing in black and white.

To change the print quality,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Adjust Image to Print Black and White.

3	Choose Print.

See Also

Print


Print View

File, Print, View

Use View to display your document as it will appear when printed.

To preview your document,

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Choose View.

See Also

Print


Save As

File, Save As

Use Save As to save your work as a new file.  You can save the file with a new name, save it to a different directory, or save it in a different format.

To use Save As,

1	Choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Choose a format from the Format drop-down list if you want to save the document to a format other than SHW 2.0 WP Presentations file.

3	Specify the drive and directory in the Filename text box.

4	Type a filename in the Save As text box.

5	Choose Save.

See Also

Add or Edit Quick List

Current Directory

Directories List

Quick List

Save in Bitmap Format

Save to Another Format


 Hint

Unless you enter a full pathname, the file is saved in the current directory.


Save to Another Format

File, Save As, Format

Use Format to select a format other than SHW 2.0 WP Presentations.

To save a document in another format,

1	Choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Select the appropriate format from the Format drop-down list.

3	Type a filename in the Save As text box.  Include the pathname if the file is in another directory.

4	Choose Save.

See Also

Current Directory

Directories List

Quick List

Save As

Save in Bitmap Format


Save in Bitmap Format

File, Save As, Format

You can save slides as bitmaps and edit them in the Bitmap Editor or export them to another application.

To save a slide as a bitmap,

1	Choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Select a format from the Format drop-down list.

3	Type a filename in the Save As text box.  Include the pathname if the file is in another directory.  A .BMP, .PCX, or .TIF extension will be added automatically by WP Presentations.

4	Choose Save.

5	Choose a resolution from the Predefined Sizes pop-up list, or specify the width and height of the image.

6	Select a format for your image.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Bitmap

Save to Another Format

Trace Bitmap


Save
Save and Retrieve

You can save or export a variety of files.  Choose from the following options for more information:

Button Bars

Charts

Color Palettes

Keyboard Layouts

Slides or Slide Shows

Save in Bitmap Format

Save to Another Format

You can retrieve, open, insert, or import a variety of files.  Choose from the following options for more information:

Button Bars

Charts (Spreadsheets)

Charts (Worksheets)

Color Palettes

Figures

Graphics and Text Files

Keyboard Layouts

Masters and Templates

Slides or Slide Shows


Preferences Keyboard

File, Preferences, Keyboard

Use Preferences Keyboard to create, edit, and select a keyboard layout.

To use the keyboard feature,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Keyboard [image].

2	Select Draw/Presentation, Chart, or Bitmap, and choose OK.

3	Choose Default (CUA), Select, Create, or Edit.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Default (CUA) Keyboard Layout

Keyboard Editor

Select Keyboard Layout


Default (CUA) Keyboard Layout

File , Preferences, Keyboard

Use Default (CUA) in the Keyboard dialog box to return to the standard default keyboard.

To select the CUA keyboard layout,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Keyboard [image].

2	Select Draw/Presentation, Chart, or Bitmap, and choose OK.

3	Choose Default (CUA).

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Keyboard Editor

Select Keyboard Layout


Select Keyboard Layout

File, Preferences, Keyboard

Use Select in the Keyboard dialog box to select a keyboard layout.

To select a keyboard layout,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Keyboard [image].

2	Select Draw/Presentation, Chart, or Bitmap, then choose OK.

3	Choose Select and select a keyboard file from the Files list box.

or... Type the keyboard filename in the Filename text box.

4	Choose Select.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Default (CUA) Keyboard Layout

Keyboard Editor


Keyboard Editor

File, Preferences, Keyboard

Use the Keyboard Editor to customize your keyboard.  You can assign commands and menus to shortcut keys, then save groups of shortcut keys together to make a keyboard layout.

The CUA keyboard cannot be edited.

To create or edit a keyboard layout,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Keyboard [image].

2	Select Draw/Presentation, Chart, or Bitmap, then choose OK.

3	Choose Create.

or... Choose Edit to edit the currently selected keyboard layout.

or... Choose Select if you want to edit a keyboard other than the one you are currently using.

4	Press the shortcut key to change the assignment.

5	Choose Unassign if you want to remove the current assignment without making a new one.  If you are finished making changes, skip to Step 9.

6	Choose an item type from the Item Types pop-up list.

7	Select the item to which you want to assign a shortcut key, make sure it appears in the Current Keystrokes list box, then choose Assign.

8	Repeat steps 4 through 8 for each item you want to change.

9	Choose Save As, type a name for the keyboard layout, then choose Save to save the new keyboard or to save changes to an existing keyboard under a different name.

10	Choose OK twice, then choose Close.

See Also

Allow Reassigning of a,b,c...1,2,3

Home Key Works Like DOS WordPerfect

Keystrokes Assigned to Item

Select Keyboard Layout


Home Key Works Like DOS WP 5.1

File, Preferences, Keyboard

Use this feature to make the Home key work as it does in WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS.

To change the Home key’s function,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Keyboard [image].

2	Select Draw/Presentation, Chart, or Bitmap, then choose OK.

3	Choose Edit to modify the currently selected keyboard layout, unless it is the CUA (default) keyboard which cannot be changed.

or... Choose Create to create a new keyboard layout.

4	Select Home Key Works Like DOS WP 5.1, then choose OK.

5	Type a name for the keyboard, choose Save, then choose OK.

or... Choose OK to save changes.

6	Choose Close.

See Also

Keyboard Editor


 Hint

For instance, Home, Home, Up repositions the insertion point at the top of a text area or text line.


Keystrokes Assigned to Item

File, Preferences, Keyboard

Use Keystrokes Assigned to Item to see what commands or menus are currently assigned to shortcut keys.

To determine what is currently assigned to shortcut keys,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Keyboard [image].

2	Select Draw/Presentation, Chart, or Bitmap, then choose OK.

3	Choose Edit unless you are using the CUA (default ) keyboard which cannot be changed.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Keyboard Editor

Shortcut Keys


Allow Reassigning of a,b,c...,1,2,3...

File, Preferences, Keyboard

Use Allow Reassigning of a,b,c...,1,2,3... in the Keyboard Editor to reassign alphanumeric keys.

Alphanumeric keys cannot be reassigned without modifier keys.

To reassign alphanumeric keys,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Keyboard [image].

2	Select Draw/Presentation, Chart, or Bitmap, then choose OK.

3	Choose Edit to edit the currently selected keyboard layout.  The CUA (default) keyboard which cannot be changed.

or... Choose Create to create a new keyboard layout.

4	Select Allow Reassigning of a,b,c...,1,2,3..., then choose OK.

5	Type a name for a new keyboard, then choose Save.

or... Choose OK if you are editing an existing keyboard.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Keyboard Editor

Shortcut Keys


Print Setup

File, Print Setup

Use Print Setup to indicate the printer you want to use.  You must select a printer before you can print.

To select a printer,

1	Choose Print Setup from the File menu.

2	Choose a printer from the Available Printers list box.

3	Choose Select to make this printer your current printer.

or... Choose Setup to select setup options.

See Also

Print


 Hint

Depending on the printer you are using, the printer dialog box that appears when you select Print Setup will vary.  Choose the Help button in the printer dialog box for more information.


About WP Presentations

What Is WP Presentations?

Use About WP Presentations to see the WP Presentations logo, the product version number and copyright, your license number, and the program and Shared DLL release dates.

If you need to call WordPerfect Presentations Customer Support, the information in About WP Presentations will help the operator assist you.  (For Customer Support phone numbers, see "Getting Help" in the Getting Started section of the WP Presentations for Windows Reference manual.)

See Also

License Number


What Is WP Presentations? (def.)
What Is WP Presentations?

WP Presentations is a presentation graphics package you can use to create colorful charts, graphs, drawings, slides, overhead transparencies, speaker notes, handouts, and sound-accompanied on-screen slide shows.


License Number

Help, About WP Presentations, Edit License Number

Use the License Number dialog box to record your license number.  You can enter your license number when you install WP Presentations or at a later time.

You need your license number when ordering product upgrades and when calling WordPerfect's Customer Support.

To enter or edit your license number,

1	Select Edit License Number from the About WP Presentations dialog box.

2	Type the license number that is printed on your registration card in the License Number dialog box.

3	Choose OK.


Contents

Welcome to WP Presentations Help

To find information on Help features, choose from the following items.  To search for information and to move through Help, use the buttons along the top of the Help window.

Choose 	For information about

How to Use Help	using Help

How Do I	performing tasks

Index	features listed alphabetically

Glossary	meanings of terms

Menu Commands	features by menu

Keyboards & Keystrokes	using keystrokes and the mouse

About WP Presentations	your license and version of WP Presentations

Palettes	using the tools in the palettes


Glossary

                           Index

The Glossary contains definitions for terms used in WP Presentations Help.

To find the definition of a term,

1	Click on the button reflecting the first letter of the term you need Help on.  For example, if you want to know the definition of gradient, choose the letter G, above.

or... Click any dot-underlined word while reading a Help topic.

A

absolute value

accelerator keys

active

alignment guide

alphanumeric keys

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

anchor handles

angle fill

annotate

application

application window

arc

area chart

arrow keys

ASCII

aspect ratio

attributes

auto link (OLE)

auto-step blending

average

axes

axis label

B

background color

backup original document

backup, timed

bar chart

base

baseline

beveled

bézier curve

Bitmap Editor

bitmap image

blend colors

blend objects

bookmark

border

brightness

built-in font

bullet

bullet chart

button

Button Bar

Button Bar directional arrows

C

cartridge

cell

cell format

center point

CGM

chart

Chart Editor

chart frame

charting tools

check box

choose

circular arc

clear current data

click

client application

Clipboard

close

closed object

cluster

CMYK

Color Palette

column

combine

command

command button

Common User Access

complement

connector

constrain

context-sensitive help

Contour Text

Control menu

Control-menu Box

coordinates

copy

correlation coefficient

cosine

crosshair pointer

CUA

cumulative total

cursor

cusp

cut

D

data chart

data label

data series

date format

default

delay time

deselect

dialog box

dialog box title bar

difference

dimmed

direction keys

directory window

delay time

dither

document

double-click

double-Y axes chart

DPI

drag

drawing tools

drawing window

drop-down list

dual-Y axes chart

E

ellipse

elliptical arc

embed

Encapsulated PostScript File

EPS

explode (chart)

explode (slice)

export

F

fade

feature

figure

figure area

Figure Editor

File Manager

filename

fill

fill color

fill gradient

fill method

fill pattern

Fit

fit exponential

fit linear

fit log

fit polynomial

fit power

fixed blending

flip

folder icon

font

forecast

foreground color

format

frame

function keys

G

gallery

gradient

gradient fill type

gray scale

grid

grid alignment guide

grid horizontal spacing

grid line, Chart

grid snap

grid vertical spacing

Group

group box

H

handle

handout

Help

Help topic

hi-lo chart

histogram

History button

HLS

horizontal chart

hot link

hue

I

icon

iconized window

import

inactive

inactive window

insertion point

interval value

invert

J

Joins

jump

Justification

K

key

keyboard layout

keystrokes

keyword

L

label

label scale factor

landscape

legend

lightness

line chart

line style

linear

link

list box

list button

log (logarithm)

M

major grid

major tick

marker

master

maximize

Maximize Button

menu

menu bar

message box

MIDI

minimize

Minimize Button

minor grid

minor tick

mirror

mitered

mnemonic

modifier keys

mouse pointer

moving average

multiple selection

Musical Instrument Digital Interface

N

No glossary terms available.

O

object

Object Linking and Embedding

OLE

open

organization chart

organization chart tools

overlay

P

palette

Palette Title Bar

paper clip

paragraph number

paste

pathname

percent of total

pie chart

pie chart tools

pixel

Pixel Editor

point

pointer

points

polygon

pop-up definition

pop-up list

pop-up menu

portrait

PostScript

PostScript laser printer

print wheel

printer driver

prompt line

pull-down menu

Q

Quick List

R

radio button

rainbow

range

raster image

regression type

results row or column

RGB

rounded

row

R-squared

Ruler

Run-time

S

saturation

Save

Save As

scale

scatter chart

scroll arrows

scroll bar

scroll box

Search

search term

Select Model

select object

select text

series

server

Shadow

shortcut keys

sine

size

skew

slide show

Slide Sorter

Slider

slider box

Snap to Grid

spooler

spreadsheet

stack

staff

standard deviation

startup options

sticky palette

stream mode

stretch

surface chart

T

table

template

text box

text chart

Text Chart Outliner

Text Editor

three-dimensional chart

thumbnail sketch/view

tick

Tile

title bar

timed backup

toggle

tool palette

transition

transparency

transpose data

typeface

U

No glossary terms available.

V

vector

vector image

vertical alignment

W

Winding

window

wipe

WordPerfect Character

Worksheet

WPG

wrap

X

X axis

Y

Y axis

Y1 axis

Y2 axis

Z

Zoom


 2-D Layout Tool, Surface Chart

A charting tool that displays your surface chart in two dimensions, like an aerial view.

How to Use It


3-D chart

A chart drawn with perspective to appear three-dimensional.

How to Use It


 3-D Tool, Pie Chart

A charting tool that displays the current pie chart in a three-dimensional view.

How to Use It


 3-D Tool, Chart

A charting tool that displays your charts in a three-dimensional appearance.

How to Use It


absolute value (def.)
absolute value

The value of a number without regard to its sign.  For example, 2, +2, and -2 each have an absolute value of 2.

How to Use It


active (def.)
active

The state of an application, window, dialog box, list, or feature that is currently in use.


 Actual Size Tool

A zoom tool that displays the drawing in the approximate size it will be when printed.

How to Use It


 Air Brush Tool

A bitmap tool that you use to spray colors and patterns.

How to Use It


alignment guides (def.)
alignment guides

Lines that can be dragged from the Ruler to help you align items.

How to Use It


alphanumeric keys (def.)
alphanumeric keys

The letter and number keys on your keyboard (such as a, b, c, and 1, 2, 3) as opposed to function keys, numeric keypad keys, or symbol keys.


anchor handles (def.)
anchor handles

The handles found on a selected bézier object that let you size and shape segments of the object.


angle fill

A gradient fill with two colors that blend on an angle you define.


annotate (def.)
Annotate

A Help feature which lets you add your own comments to a Help topic.  When you annotate a help topic, a paper clip icon is placed in the upper left corner of the topic.  Click the paper click to display your comments.


application (def.)
application

Software designed to carry out specific actions or activity, such as word processing, electronic mail, or spreadsheet functions.  Sometimes called a program.


application window (def.)
application window

The window that contains the operating features of WP Presentations, such as the menu bar, Button Bar, and tool palette.  Drawing windows are placed within the application window and, if your computer has enough memory, WP Presentations lets you open as many as nine document windows at a time.


arc (def.)
arc

A segment of an ellipse or circle.


area chart (def.)
area chart

A data chart that shows values changing in proportion to the total over a period of time.

How to Use It


 Area Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays a filled area beneath the line that represents the data.

How to Use It


arrow keys (def.)
arrow keys

The up, down, left, and right keys that can be used to move the pointer or insertion point.  The arrow keys are sometimes called direction keys.


 Arrow Tool

A tool in the bitmap or drawing tool palettes that you use to draw arrows.

How to Use It


ASCII (def.)
ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange.  One of the standard formats for representing characters on a computer.  It is useful when files are shared between programs.  A DOS text file is usually in ASCII format.


aspect ratio (def.)
aspect ratio

The ratio of the width of an item in the drawing window to the length of the drawing or slide.  To avoid distorting an item while sizing, use the constrain feature.


attributes (def.)
attributes

Elements that determine the appearance of text (for example, Bold, Times New Roman, 12 point) or a graphic in the drawing window (for example, fill, line width, background color).


Auto-Step Blending

A feature that automatically assigns the number of blending steps between the chosen colors.


average (def.)
average

The total of the data values in a row or column divided by the number of cells in that row or column.

How to Use It


axes (def.)
axes

The horizontal (X axis) or vertical (Y axis) lines used as reference points for plotting data charts.

How to Use It


axis label (def.)
axis label

The title of an axis.

How to Use It


background color (def.)
background color

The color that appears behind fill and line patterns.

How to Use It


Original Document Backup (def.)
Original Document Backup

A backup copy of your document with a .BAK extension that is created when you save a document.  Each time you save a document with changes you have made, the old .BAK file is replaced with the newest .BAK file.

How to Use It


Timed Document Backup (def.)
Timed Document Backup

A backup copy of your current document which is created at the time interval you specify.  Each new backup replaces the previous backup.

How to Use It


bar chart (def.)
bar chart

A chart that uses bars to compare values.

How to Use It


 Bar Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays your data as vertical or horizontal bars.

How to Use It


base (def.)
base

A box at the bottom of a 3-D chart.  The chart appears to rest on top of the base.

How to Use It


baseline (def.)
baseline

The invisible line upon which text is placed.  Each letter sits immediately on the baseline.  For letters with descenders (such as, g, j, p, and y), the descenders drop below the baseline.


bevel (def.)
bevel

A joint or angle in a line with a flat corner, like a jewel facet.

How to Use It


bézier curve (def.)
bézier curve

A smooth curved line that can be easily moved and edited with control handles that appear at various points in the curve.

How to Use It


bitmap image (def.)
bitmap image

A graphics image formed by a series of dots (pixels).  A bitmap image is also referred to as a paint image or a raster image.  Scanned photographs and images created in "paint" applications are bitmap images.

How to Use It


Bitmap Editor (def.)
Bitmap Editor

A window with BITMAP EDITOR across the bottom of the screen that you use to create and edit bitmap images.  Click here for information on getting into the Bitmap Editor:


Open the Bitmap Editor

To create a bitmap image and open the Bitmap Editor,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the bitmap image.

or... Click once to create a full page bitmap.

To edit an existing bitmap image,

1	Select and double-click the bitmap.

The Bitmap Editor appears with BITMAP EDITOR on the bottom of the screen.


 Bitmap Tool

A drawing tool in the tool palette that you use to define an area for a bitmap image.

How to Use It


blend colors (def.)
blend (colors)

A procedure used to create new color shades between two colors on the color palette by mixing the colors.  A blend is like pouring two cans of different colored paint towards each other so the paint flows to a central point.  At that point, the paint mixes evenly.  But at either end, one color is more intense than the other.

How to Use It


blend objects (def.)
blend (objects)

A procedure used to combine two drawing objects so that one object gradually takes on the attributes and shape of the other object in increments.

How to Use It


Block Mode (def.)
Block Mode

An option that you use to select a rectangular cross-section of the color when you want to blend, rainbow, or find the complement of the color.

How to Use It


Bookmark (def.)
Bookmark

A feature that you use to mark several Help topics for easy reference at a later time.


border (def.)
border

The outer edge of a window or frame that can be moved to enlarge or reduce its size.

How to Use It


 Bottom to Top Tool

An organization chart tool that displays the chart levels with the last level at the top and the first level at the bottom.

How to Use It


built-in font (def.)
built-in fonts

The fonts built into a printer that can be accessed by software.


bullet (def.)
bullet

A symbol, such as a small filled circle, that precedes each item in a list.

How to Use It


bullet chart (def.)
bullet chart

A chart containing text items that are marked with bullets.

How to Use It


 Bullet Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays your data as a bulleted list.

How to Use It


button (def.)
button

A graphic that represents a command or option.  An inactive button has a dimmed appearance.


Button Bar (def.)
Button Bar

A feature that contains buttons representing features you use often.  When the Button Bar option of the View menu is selected, the Button Bar appears in the application window.  You can create your own customized Button Bars.

How to Use It


Button Bar directional arrows (def.)
 Button Bar directional arrows

The arrows found on a Button Bar that is longer than the screen.  The directional arrows let you scroll the Button Bar to show buttons not displayed on the screen.


cartridge (def.)
cartridge

A printer cassette which contains printer fonts.


cascade (def.)
cascade

To display drawing windows and menus in an overlapping format.

How to Use It


cell (def.)
cell

The intersection of a row and a column in a table or Worksheet.


cell format (def.)
cell format

In a Worksheet, the cell format controls how the data appears in the cell.  The data can be a number or a date.

How to Use It


center point (def.)
center point

The point around which an object is rotated, or the point toward which or away from which an object is sized.

How to Use It


CGM (def.)
CGM

Computer Graphic Metafile.  A standard format for graphic images that can be shared among different applications.


chart (def.)
chart

A diagram that contains graphed data, lines of text, or a table.  You create charts using the Chart Editor.

How to Use It


 Chart Tool

A drawing tool that you use to define an area for a chart.

How to Use It


Chart Editor (def.)
Chart Editor

A window with CHART EDITOR across the bottom of the screen that you use to create and edit charts.  Click here for information on getting into the Chart Editor:


Open the Chart Editor

To create a chart and open the Chart Editor,

1	Click [image] in the tool palette.

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the chart.

or... Click once to create a full page chart.

3	Select the type of chart you want to create and choose OK.

To edit an existing chart,

1	Select and double-click the chart.

The Chart Editor appears with CHART EDITOR on the bottom of the screen.


charting tools (def.)
charting tools

The tools in the chart tool palette that can be used when you are creating or editing a chart.

How to Use It


check box (def.)
check box

A small box in a dialog box that you use to turn an option on or off.  If a check box contains an X, the option is on.  You can select more than one check box in a dialog box.

How to Use It


choose (def.)
choose

To click a menu item or dialog box option that starts an action immediately.


circular arc (def.)
circular arc

A portion of a cirlce.

How to Use It


clear current data (def.)
clear current data

An option that allows the spreadsheet being imported to overwrite the existing Worksheet.

How to Use It


click (def.)
click

To press and release the mouse button.


client application (def.)
client application

An application that can link and embed text or graphics images created in a server application.


Clipboard (def.)
Clipboard

An area of memory where text and commands are stored, after being cut or copied from the document, to await further action.  You can see the Clipboard contents using the Windows Clipboard application.  The Clipboard contents are erased when you exit Windows.


close (def.)
close

To shut down or exit a dialog box, window, or application.


Closed Curve Tool

A drawing tool that you use to draw a curved object that is completely enclosed and can be filled with a color or fill pattern.

How to Use It


closed object (def.)
closed object

An object in which all points connect.  A closed object can be filled with color and fill patterns.


cluster (def.)
cluster

A bar chart style that categorizes items being compared.  Each category is represented by a cluster of bars.


 Cluster Tool

A charting tool that displays the bars of a chart representing each column of the Worksheet in clustered groups.

How to Use It


CMYK (def.)
CMYK

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black.  Varying quantities of these colors can be used for color separations in plastic slides or color copies.

How to Use It


Color Palette (def.)
 Color Palette

A set of colors displayed on a rectangular grid.  These colors can be used to add color to drawings or slides.

How to Use It


column (def.)
column

A vertical set of cells in a Worksheet that is designated by consecutive letters of the alphabet.


combine (def.)
combine

To combine two or more objects into one object, using the fill, color, and line attributes of the bottom object.  Any areas that overlap between combined objects are cut out so you can see whatever is behind them.

How to Use It


command (def.)
command

An instruction given to a computer to carry out a particular action.  Commands are activated in menus and dialog boxes and through shortcut keys.


command button (def.)
command button

A dialog box option that, when chosen, starts an action.  Examples of command buttons include the OK, Cancel, and View buttons.


complement (def.)
complement

The opposite of a specific color.  Colors that are opposite each other on the color wheel are complementary colors, (such as red and green, yellow and blue).


connectors (def.)
connectors

Lines that connect different levels in an organization chart.

How to Use It


constrain (def.)
constrain

To maintain control over mouse movement as you create and edit objects and areas by holding down the Ctrl key.  For example, when drawing an ellipse you can constrain it to a perfect circle, or you can constrain a bitmap area to the shape of a perfect square.


context-sensitive help (def.)
context-sensitive help

A screen that gives you specific information about the item you click on.  You can get more general context-sensitive help by pressing F1, or specific information by pressing Shift+F1 and clicking on the item where you want help ("What Is" help).


contour text (def.)
contour text

To shape text around a drawing object.

How to Use It


Control-menu (def.)
Control-menu

The menu that appears when you open the Control-menu box.  The Control-menu contains commands that control a dialog box or a window.  For example, in a dialog box, the Control-menu commands let you move or close the dialog box.


Control-menu box (def.)
Control-menu box

A small rectangular button in the upper left corner of the window or dialog box.  You can access the Control-menu by clicking on the Control-menu box.


coordinates (def.)
coordinates

The address that identifies a cell in a Worksheet or spreadsheet by its column and row (for example, "A1").


copy (def.)
copy

To duplicate text or a graphic and place it on the Clipboard.

How to Use It


correlation coefficient (def.)
correlation coefficient

The relationship between values on the two axes in a data chart.


cosine (def.)
cosine

The ratio between the adjacent side and the hypotenuse when the source number is expressed as an angle (degrees or radians).

How to Use It


crosshair pointer (def.)
crosshair pointer

A pointer that appears as a cross with lines that extend to the edges of the window.  The crosshair pointer can help you create, align, and size objects with precision, especially when used with the Ruler.

How to Use It


CUA (def.)
CUA

Common User Access.  A set of shortcut keys common to many Windows applications.


cumulative total (def.)
cumulative total

The result of adding the values in a row or column, then adding that accumulated total to the next row or column, and so on.

How to Use It


current chart window

A window on the chart tool palettes that displays the chart icon when you are in the Chart Editor.


current tool window

A window on the drawing and bitmap tool palettes that displays the icon of the tool you have selected.


 Curve Tool

A drawing tool that you use to draw a curved line.

How to Use It


cusp (def.)
cusp

A pointed corner where two bézier segments meet at different angles.

How to Use It


cut (def.)
cut

To remove text or a graphic and place it on the Clipboard.

How to Use It


data chart (def.)
data chart

A chart created with data you enter in the Worksheet.  Data charts include table, pie, bar, line, area, surface, scatter, and hi-lo charts.


data label (def.)
data label

A name assigned to a tick on the X axis.


data series (def.)
data series

There are three types of data series:

Date Series

Linear Series

Growth Series

How to Use It


date series

A data series that starts with the date in the Start Value text box and increases by the Step number, using the units you choose from the Date pop-up list.


growth series

A data series that starts with the Start Value number and multiplies by the Step number to create each new number in the series.


linear series

A data series that starts with the number in the Start Value text box and adds the number in the Step text box to create each new number in the series.


default (def.)
default

Sometimes called an "initial setting," a default is a setting, value, or response that is automatically provided by WP Presentations unless you specify an alternative.

Some defaults can be changed for all future documents through Preferences.  Other options can change a default for the active document only, then reset when you exit WP Presentations.

How to Use It


delay time (def.)
delay time

The amount of time each slide is left on the screen during a slide show.

How to Use It


deselect (def.)
deselect

To click away from a selected item in the drawing window so that it is no longer selected.  You can also deselect an active menu item or dialog box option by clicking on it.


dialog box (def.)
dialog box

A box that you use to select and activate options by choosing appropriate command buttons (such as OK).  Some dialog boxes display warnings and messages you need before taking action.

How to Use It


dialog box title bar (def.)
dialog box title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of the dialog box that contains the name of the dialog box and the Control-menu box.


difference (def.)
difference

The result of subtracting the value of one row from another row, or one column from another column.

How to Use It


dimmed (def.)
dimmed

The appearance of an icon, command, or button that cannot be selected.


directory window (def.)
directory window

A view of all the files contained in a single directory.


 Display All Levels Tool, Organization Chart

An organization chart tool that displays boxes around organization positions in all levels.

How to Use It


 Display First Level Tool, Organization Chart

An organization chart tool that displays boxes around the each first-level position in the organization.

How to Use It


 Display First/Middle Levels Tool, Organization Chart

An organization chart tool that displays boxes around all first-level and middle-level positions in the organization.

How to Use It


 Display None Tool, Organization Chart

An organization chart tool that turns off the display of boxes around organization positions.

How to Use It


 Display Table Tool, pie chart

A pie chart tool that displays the Worksheet data in a table below the pies in the chart.

How to Use It


 Display Table Tool

A charting tool that displays your data in table form beneath the corresponding chart.

How to Use It


dither (def.)
dither

To create a new color by combining several different colored pixels.

How to Use It


document (def.)
document

A file (drawing, text, slide show, etc.) created in WP Presentations.


double Y axes chart (def.)
double Y axes chart

A chart with one X axis and two Y axes.  Useful when you want to compare two items; for example, sales for a particular region during two different sales periods.

How to Use It


double-click (def.)
double-click

To press and release the mouse button twice in rapid succession.


DPI (def.)
DPI

Acronym for dots (pixels) per inch.  Determines the clarity of a graphic image on the monitor or when printed.  The greater the dots per inch, the more detail is visible.


drag (def.)
drag

To move an object or to define an area by moving the mouse while you hold down the mouse button.


 Drawing Area Tool

A zoom tool that displays the drawing in the drawing window.  This is the default drawing view.

How to Use It


drawing tools (def.)
drawing tools

The tools in the tool palette that can be used whenever you are creating or editing a drawing.

How to Use It


drawing window (def.)
drawing window

The window where you create a single drawing or multiple slides in a slide show.  When WP Presentations starts, a new document window opens inside the application window.  You can open as many as nine document windows inside the application window.


drop-down list (def.)
drop-down list

A list of options that appears to "drop down" from an option when you click on a button in a dialog box.

How to Use It


ellipse (def.)
ellipse

An elongated circle.

How to Use It


 Ellipse Tool

A drawing tool that you use to draw ellipses and circles.

How to Use It


elliptical arc (def.)
elliptical arc

A pointed, elongated arc.

How to Use It


 Elliptical Arc Tool

A tool on the bitmap and drawing tool palettes that you use to draw an arc.

How to Use It


embed (def.)
embed

To place an item created in one application into a document created in another application.  For example, you can embed text created in WordPerfect into a WP Presentations drawing window.

How to Use It


EPS (def.)
EPS

Encapsulated PostScript File.  EPS is a graphic or text file stored using instructions written in PostScript.  An EPS file lets you print at the highest possible resolution to a PostScript laser printer.


 Eraser Tool

A drawing tool that you use to change all pixels touched by the tool to one color.

How to Use It


explode (chart) (def.)
explode (chart)

To change a chart into separate drawing objects that can be edited individually.  Once you explode a chart, you cannot edit its data.

How to Use It


explode (slice) (def.)
explode (slice)

To pull away a "slice" in a pie chart for emphasis.

How to Use It


export (def.)
export

To save a document in a different format so that it can be used in another application.

How to Use It


fade (def.)
fade

To slowly change from one slide to the next.


feature (def.)
feature

A special capability or tool in a computer program.


figure (def.)
figure

Clip Art or other graphics files you can retrieve into the drawing window.  A figure is made up of objects that are grouped together.

How to Use It


figure area (def.)
figure area

An area you define for retrieving graphics files into the drawing window.  A figure area can be sized and moved.

How to Use It


 Figure Tool

A drawing tool that you use to retrieve a graphics image anywhere in the drawing window.

How to Use It


Figure Editor (def.)
Figure Editor

A window that you use to create or edit figures.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Figure Editor:


Open the Figure Editor

To open the Figure Editor,

1	Double-click an existing figure.

or... Select a figure and choose Edit Figure from the Edit menu.


File Manager (def.)
File Manager

A WordPerfect application used to view, organize, print, and manipulate your files without opening them.

How to Use It


filename (def.)
filename

The name given to a document.  A filename may have as many as eight characters and an optional three-letter extension, such as BIRTHDAY.WPG.


fill (def.)
fill

A color or pattern you can add to a closed object or data chart series.

How to Use It


fill color (def.)
fill color

A color that fills a closed object or data chart series.

How to Use It


Fill Color Palette (def.)
 Fill Color Palette

A drawing tool that you use to choose a color for the fill pattern from a color palette.

How to Use It


fill gradient (def.)
fill gradient

The filling of a closed object or data chart series in which one color gradually blends into another.

How to Use It


fill method (def.)
fill method

The method you use to apply a fill to an object.

  Alternate:  fills every other enclosed area.

  Winding:  fills the enclosed areas, including overlapping areas.

How to Use It


 Fill On/Off Tool

A drawing tool that you use to specify which objects to fill with a color and pattern.

How to Use It


fill pattern (def.)
fill pattern

A design, such as dots or diagonal lines, that fills a closed object or data chart series.

How to Use It


fit (def.)
fit

A formula used to forecast trend lines and regression types.

How to Use It


fit exponential

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to an exponential curve: 1n(y)=a+bx.


fit linear

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to a line:  y=a+bx.


fit log

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to a logarithmic curve:  y=a+bx(In(x)).


fit polynomial

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to a polynomial curve:  y+c0+c1*x+c2...+cn*xn (where n is the order of the fit).


fit power

A formula that fits the data in a row or column to a power curve:  y=axb.


Fixed Blending

A feature that you use to indicate the number of blending steps between two colors.


flip (def.)
flip

Sometimes called "mirrored image," a flip is a reflected image of a drawing, figure, chart, or text object.  If you flip an image on the X axis, the object is reflected horizontally.  If you flip an image on the Y axis, the object is reflected vertically.

How to Use It


 Flood Fill Tool

A drawing tool that you use to change the color or fill attributes of an area.

How to Use It


folder icon (def.)
 folder icon

A small file-folder icon next to a text box.  Sometimes called a "list button," the folder icon appears on some dialog boxes and is used to access another dialog box to select files or to change directories.

How to Use It


font (def.)
font

A group of letters, numbers, and symbols with a common typeface.  Fonts are described by name, weight, and size, as in Helvetica Bold 10pt.

How to Use It


forecast (def.)
forecast

To predict future trends in a chart using the Fit feature.


foreground color (def.)
foreground color

The color that appears on top of the background in a fill pattern.

How to Use It


format (def.)
format

A collective term for margins, spacing, page length, point size, and the general visual appearance of the printed page.

How to Use It


frame (data chart) (def.)
frame (data chart)

A group of lines framing a side of a chart.  Chart frames can be on the back, front, left, right, top, or bottom of a chart.  Each line in a chart frame represents a data value.

How to Use It


frame (def.)
frame (text, chart, bitmap, or figure)

A box that defines an area in the drawing window for text, a chart, a bitmap image, or a figure.  You can increase or decrease the size of the frame by dragging one of the handles surrounding it.


 Freehand Tool

A drawing tool that you use to draw freehand lines.  Freehand lines follow the exact trail of the mouse.

How to Use It


 Full Grid Tool

A charting tool that displays your table with a full grid.

How to Use It


 Full Page Tool

A zoom tool that displays the the entire page.

How to Use It


function keys (def.)
function keys

A set of keys, usually labeled F1, F2, F3, and so forth, used by themselves or with the Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys to provide quick access to certain features in an application.


Gallery (def.)
Gallery

A feature that exhibits small sketches of slides and master slides so you can view them together.


 Chart Gallery Tool

A charting tool that displays samples of the different types of charts you can create.

How to Use It


gradient (def.)
gradient

A gradual change in the color of an object or a page.


gradient fill type

An option that you use to choose the shape of the color blend.  Linear gives a series of flat lines, while Circular and Rectangular bend the color bands around straight or curved lines.


gray scale (def.)
gray scale

The various shades of gray that appear in a drawing when it is printed or displayed in black and white.


grid (def.)
grid

A set of dotted lines, similar to those found on graph paper, that display on the screen to help you measure and align objects.  Grid lines do not print.

How to Use It


grid alignment guide (def.)
grid alignment guide

A value that determines where objects align with grids when the Snap to Grid is turned on.  For example, if you specify .50, WP Presentations forces any object you align to correspond with grid points appearing every 1/2 inch.

How to Use It


grid line (chart) (def.)
grid line (chart)

A line that represents a value increment in a chart frame.

How to Use It


grid horizontal spacing (def.)
grid horizontal spacing

The value that determines the interval between grid points on a horizontal grid.  For example, if the horizontal spacing is .50, then a 1/2 inch of space appears between each horizontal grid point.

How to Use It


grid vertical spacing (def.)
grid vertical spacing

The value that determines the interval between grid points on a vertical grid.  For example, if the vertical spacing is .50, then a 1/2 inch of space appears between each vertical grid point.

How to Use It


group (def.)
group

To select several objects and group them as one object.

How to Use It


group box (def.)
group box

A grouping of related options in a dialog box.

How to Use It


handout (def.)
handout

A printed copy of a slide show.

How to Use It


handle (def.)
handle

A small black square that appears on screen to let you size and manipulate a selected item using a mouse.

How to Use It


Help (def.)
Help

An online feature that gives you instructions on using WP Presentations.


help prompt (def.)
help prompt

A line of text that appears in the title bar and gives you additional information about a feature when you select it.


Help topic (def.)
Help topic

A Help screen containing a brief description of a feature with step-by-step instructions on how to use it.  Help topics often contain jump terms, pop-up windows, and See Also lists.


 Highlight All Tool, Bullet Chart

A bullet chart tool that highlights the chart title and the bullet chart.

How to Use It


 Highlight Body Tool, Bullet Chart

A bullet chart tool that highlights the bullet chart only.

How to Use It


 Highlight None Tool, Bullet Chart

A bullet chart tool that turns off background highlighting for the chart.

How to Use It


 Highlight Title Tool, Bullet Chart

A bullet chart tool that highlights (places a filled box behind) the bullet chart title.

How to Use It


hi-lo chart (def.)
hi-lo chart

A line chart that shows the high and low values of items being compared.  For example, a hi-lo chart could compare daily low and high values of a stock over five days.

How to Use It


 Hi-lo Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays the range between the highest and lowest points in a data series as a line or bar, with marks to indicate the values of the first and last data points.

How to Use It


Hint graphic

A yellow light bulb symbol used in Help topics indicates additional information or directions.  Hints offer information which is helpful but not critical to the use of a feature.


histogram (def.)
histogram

A bar chart that shows the distribution of various elements being compared.  For example, a histogram could compare the monthly sales for three sales regions during a one-year period.

How to Use It


HLS (def.)
HLS

Hue, Lightness, Saturation (qualities of colors).  Changing any of these affects the intensity of the color.

How to Use It


horizontal chart (def.)
horizontal chart

A bar chart with horizontal bars.  In a horizontal chart, the X axis is vertical and the Y axis is horizontal.

How to Use It


 Horizontal Display Tool

A charting tool that displays some types of charts with the X and Y axes switched.

How to Use It


How Do I (def.)
How Do I

A Help feature that you use to get instructions on how to perform a specific task.

How to Use It


hue (def.)
hue

A classification of shades of red, yellow, and blue, including combinations of these colors.


icon (def.)
icon

A small graphic representing an application or a tool.  You can click or double-click on the icon to bring about an action; for example, you can double-click on an application icon to open the application.  Icons used in Help topics are pop-ups containing additional information.


iconized window (def.)
iconized window

A minimized window that appears as an icon.  To restore the window to its previous size, double-click the icon.


import (def.)
import

To retrieve information from one program into another.

How to Use It


Important graphic

A red exclamation point used in Help topics to indicate information or directions critical to the use of a feature.


inactive (def.)
inactive

The state of an application, window, dialog box, or option that is currently not available or in use.


inactive window (def.)
inactive window

A window which is not currently in use.  An inactive window can be identified by its dimmed title bar.  Shortcut keys and mouse actions do not affect the contents of an inactive window.


insertion point (def.)
insertion point

A blinking vertical bar that appears in a text box or in a dialog box to indicate where text will appear when you type.  The insertion point is sometimes called a cursor.


interval value (def.)
interval value

A value that defines which grid points you want to display.  For example, if you specify 5, every fifth grid point is visible on the screen.


Joins (def.)
Joins

A feature that you use to bevel, mitre, or round angles in a line.  A mitred join has a sharp point at the angle.  A rounded join has a rounded angle.  The point of a beveled corner is flattened.

How to Use It


Justification (def.)
Justification

A feature that you use to position text in relation to the sides of a text line or text area.  You can choose Left, which leaves a ragged right margin, Right, which leaves a ragged left margin, or Center, which centers text between both margins.

How to Use It


Key (def.)
Key

A feature that you use to assign a keyboard character to a slide so that when that character is pressed, the slide appears.

How to Use It


keyboard layout (def.)
keyboard layout

A group of shortcut keys saved together in a file.  In WP Presentations, you can create and use as many keyboard layouts as disk space allows.


keyword (def.)
keyword

A word (also known as a search term) you type in the Search feature to find help for a particular topic or task.  For example, if you search for the keyword "zoom," WP Presentations will find Help topics about the Zoom feature.


label (def.)
label

Text that shows the numeric value, time period, or category of a bar, line, pie slice, or other item in a data chart.

How to Use It


 Label Dividers Tool

A charting tool that displays your table with a line between the labels and the data.

How to Use It


label leader

A line that attaches a data label to a slice in a pie chart.  Label leader is sometimes referred to as a slice pointer.

How to Use It


label scale factor (def.)
label scale factor

A number by which the maximum value in a bar chart is divided.  Using a smaller maximum value can make some charts easier to read.

How to Use It


landscape (def.)
landscape

A page orientation in which the long edge of the page runs horizontally.

How to Use It


 Left to Right Tool

An organization chart tool that displays the chart levels with the first level at the left and the last level at the right.

How to Use It


legend (def.)
legend

A list of the colors, patterns, or symbols used to show comparisons on a data chart.

How to Use It


lightness (def.)
lightness

A color exposed to white light causing it to lose its pure color.


line chart (def.)
line chart

A chart that shows the differences in data by connecting the data points with lines.  Line charts usually compare data over a specific time period.

How to Use It


 Line Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays your data as a series of points connected by lines.

How to Use It


 Line Color Palette

A drawing tool that you use to choose from a color for the line around objects.

How to Use It


 Line On/Off Tool

A drawing tool that you use to specify whether objects are drawn with a line for a border.

If the Fill feature is off for an object and you turn off the Line feature, Fill is turned back on so the object will be visible.

How to Use It


 Line Pattern Palette

A drawing tool that you use to choose from a palette a thickness and style for the lines around objects.

How to Use It


line style

The style you specify for a line you draw.  For example, a line can be thin, thick, dotted, or dashed.

How to Use It


 Line Tool

A drawing tool that you use to draw a horizontal, vertical, or diagonal line.

How to Use It


linear (def.)
linear

A way to display the values on an axis in even increments.  For example, using the linear method for an axis might result in values of 1, 2, 3, and so on, all equal distances apart.

How to Use It


link to spreadsheet (def.)
link to spreadsheet

An option that links an imported spreadsheet to its original application.

How to Use It


list box (def.)
list box

A box that displays a list of choices.  When a list is too long to display all choices, a scroll bar appears so that you can view additional items.

How to Use It


log (logarithm) (def.)
log (logarithm)

A way to exponentially increase the values on an axis.  For example, using the log method for an axis might result in values of 10, 100, 1000, and so on, all equal distances apart.

How to Use It


Loop (def.)
Loop

A sound option that conserves disk space by using a single audio file with multiple slide shows.

How to Use It


major grid (def.)
major grid

A prominent grid line that parallels the X axis or Y axis in a chart.  Major grids have data labels that define their values.

How to Use It


major tick (def.)
major tick

A tick that marks a prominent grid line paralleling the X axis or Y axis in a chart.

How to Use It


marker (def.)
marker

A small graphics device that marks each X, Y point in a scatter chart.

How to Use It


master (def.)
master

A set of slide templates with the same design.  For example, in the Surf master, each template has crashing waves in the background.

How to Use It


maximize (def.)
maximize

To enlarge a window to its maximum size.

How to Use It


Maximize Button (def.)
Maximize Button

A button that you use to enlarge a small window to its maximum size.  A window that is smaller than a full-screen window, yet not minimized to an icon, can also be maximized by double-clicking its title bar.

How to Use It


menu (def.)
menu

A pull-down list of on-screen options where you can select a particular function or command.


menu bar (def.)
menu bar

The area at the top of each WP Presentations window containing menu titles such as File, Edit, and View.

How to Use It


message box (def.)
message box

A non-moveable, non-sizable window that gives you error messages or warnings.


MIDI (def.)
MIDI

Musical Instrument Digital Interface.  A format that allows communication of musical data between computers and synthesizers.

How to Use It


minimize (def.)
minimize

To shrink an application or document to an icon.  When an application is minimized, it continues running.

How to Use It


Minimize Button (def.)
Minimize Button

A button that you use to shrink an application window or document window to an icon.

How to Use It


minor grid (def.)
minor grid

A grid line that parallels the X axis or Y axis and marks a value between two major grid lines.

How to Use It


minor tick (def.)
minor tick

A tick that marks a minor grid line.

How to Use It


mitre (def.)
mitre

A joint or angle in a line with a sharp point like a picture frame.

Line Attributes


mnemonic (def.)
mnemonic

An underlined letter on a menu bar or dialog box item that indicates keystroke access for that item.  When you use a mnemonic to open a menu, you must press Alt before you press the mnemonic letter.


modifier keys (def.)
modifier keys

The collective name for the Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys.  When pressed simultaneously with other keys (such as function keys), modifier keys change the original functions of those keys.


moving average (def.)
moving average

The total value of data in the current cell and adjacent cells, divided by the number of specified cells.

How to Use It


MT32 (def.)
MT32

A sound option that lets a selected sound file play continuously during a slide show until a subsequent file begins.

How to Use It


object (def.)
object

An item you can draw using one of the drawing tools.


OLE (def.)
object linking and embedding (OLE)

To create a document in one application (client application) that contains text or graphics created in another application (server application).  When the object is altered in the server application, it is automatically updated in the client application.


On Disk (def.)
On Disk

A sound option that ensures consistency among sound files written according to the MT32 standard.

How to Use It


open (def.)
open

To activate an application, file, window, or dialog box.


organization chart (def.)
organization chart

A diagram that shows the hierarchical levels of work tasks, employees, or groups.

How to Use It


 Organization Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays your data in a form that shows the relationships of people in organizations.

How to Use It


organization chart tools (def.)
organization chart tools

The tools in the organization tool palette used to create or edit an organization chart.

How to Use It


 Overlap Tool

A charting tool that displays the bars of a chart representing each column of a Worksheet in overlapping groups.

How to Use It


overlay (def.)
overlay

A button on the Slide Transition dialog box that you use to place one slide over another one.

How to Use It


 Paint Brush Tool

A drawing tool that you use to paint colored lines and patterns.

How to Use It


palette (def.)
palette

An on-screen box or window that contains drawing tools, available colors, or possible fill patterns.


palette title bar (def.)
palette title bar

The bar at the top of a tool palette which you can use to drag the tool palette to a new location on the screen.


paper clip (def.)
paper clip icon

The annotation mark that appears at the top left corner of a Help topic and acts as a bookmark, marking the topic for easy reference at a later time.  Double-clicking the icon displays notes and comments that you have added to Help topics.


paragraph number (def.)
paragraph number

Designates a new item in an outline.  Also designates a slide title or slide text in a slide show.  Each first-level paragraph number (such as a Roman numeral) designates a slide title; each second and third-level number (such as capital letters and Arabic numerals) designates text in a slide.

How to Use It


paste (def.)
paste

To insert the contents of the Clipboard into the active window.

How to Use It


pathname (def.)
pathname

The "address" of a file.  A full pathname includes the drive, the root directory, any subdirectory names, and the filename.  For example, c:\prwin\birthday.wpg.


 Pattern Palette

A drawing tool that you use to choose a pattern for the filled area inside objects from a palette.

How to Use It


percent of total (def.)
percent of total

The percentage value of one cell out of the total value of the cells in the current row or column.

How to Use It


 Pickup Color Tool

A drawing tool that you use to select a color directly from any part of a bitmap image.

How to Use It


pie chart (def.)
pie chart

A circular chart showing each element as a slice of the circle and how that slice relates to the whole.

How to Use It


 Pie Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays data as slices of a pie.

How to Use It


pie chart tools (def.)
pie chart tools

The tools in the pie chart tool palette used to create or edit a pie chart.

How to Use It


pixel (def.)
pixel

Short for Picture Element.  A pixel is the smallest dot that can be represented on a screen or in a paint (bitmap) graphic.

How to Use It


Pixel Editor (def.)
Pixel Editor

The place which provides a magnified view of a bitmap image and lets you edit each pixel of the bitmap.

How to Use It


point (n.) (def.)
point (n.)

A typographical unit of measure (1/72") used for font sizes.


point (v.) (def.)
point (v.)

To move the pointer to the item you want to select or choose.


pointer (def.)
pointer

The icon on the screen that moves with the mouse.  The pointer's shape may change, depending on what features are active and where you are on the screen.


polygon (def.)
polygon

A closed figure that has at least three sides.

How to Use It


 Polygon Tool

A drawing tool that you use to draw a polygon.

How to Use It


pop-up list (def.)
pop-up list

A list of options that appears when you click on a button or other item in a dialog box.

How to Use It


Pop-up Menu (def.)
Pop-up Menu

The menu that appears in the drawing window when you click the right mouse button.  When you click in a blank area of the drawing window, the menu offers selection options.  If you click an object, the menu also includes editing options.  When you edit the points of an object, the Pop-up Menu contains specific options related to editing points.

How to Use It


 Proportional Pies Tool

A pie chart tool that displays the pie charts proportionally according to their data values.  For example, a pie chart whose slices total 75 will be larger than a pie chart whose slices total 50.

How to Use It


portrait (def.)
portrait

A page orientation in which the long edge of the page runs vertically.

How to Use It


 Position Above and Below Tool, Bullet Chart

A bullet chart tool that places filled boxes above (before) and below (after) the bullet chart title or body.

How to Use It


 Position Above Tool, Bullet Chart

A bullet chart tool that places the filled box above (before) the bullet chart title or body.

How to Use It


  Position Behind Tool, Bullet Chart

A bullet chart tool chart tool that places the filled box behind (beneath) the bullet chart title or body.

How to Use It


 Position Below Tool, Bullet Chart

A bullet chart tool that places the filled box below (after) the bullet chart title or body.

How to Use It


PostScript (def.)
PostScript

A page description language for medium to high resolution printers which is used mainly in desktop publishing.  PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.


PostScript laser printer (def.)
PostScript laser printer

A laser printer that decodes and interprets printing instructions in PostScript.  PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.


Preferences Backup (def.)
Preferences Backup

A feature you use to control how and when a backup copy of your current slide show or drawing file is made.

How to Use It


Preferences Date Format (def.)
Preferences Date Format

A feature you can use to change the appearance of date text inserted with the Date Text or Date Code options.

How to Use It


Preferences Display (def.)
Preferences Display

A feature you use to control how certain features appear and function for each new slide.

How to Use It


Preferences Environment (def.)
Preferences Environment

A feature that you use to determine how several miscellaneous features operate, including default options.

How to Use It


Keyboard (def.)
Preferences Keyboard

A feature you can use to select a keyboard layout or create or edit a keyboard layout.

How to Use It


Preferences Language

A feature that you use to set the language for WP Presentations.

How to Use It


Preferences Location of Files (def.)
Preferences Location of Files

A feature that you use to tell WP Presentations where to store and access your files.

How to Use It


Preferences Page Layout (def.)
Preferences Page Layout

A feature you use to set your default page appearance.

How to Use It


Preferences Print (def.)
Preferences Print

A feature you use to set your default print options, number of copies, document quality, and binding offset.

How to Use It


Preferences Slide Show (def.)
Preferences Slide Show

A feature you use to set the number of slides per row and the default master for all new slide shows.

How to Use It


print wheel (def.)
print wheel

A detachable printer wheel containing various typefaces.


printer driver (def.)
printer driver

A system file that controls the font and other printing information between your system and your printer.


Quick List (def.)
Quick List

A list that instantly displays the contents of a specific directory without having to type the entire pathname each time you save or open a document.

How to Use It


R-squared (def.)
R-squared

Square of the relationship of the values on the two axes.


radio button (def.)
radio button

One of a set of buttons (or small circles) found before options in a dialog box.  Only one radio button in a set may be selected at a time.

How to Use It


rainbow (def.)
rainbow

An array of colors displayed in definite color bands.

How to Use It


range (def.)
range

The coordinates for multiple cells in a spreadsheet.


 Range Colors Tool

A charting tool that displays your table with the range colors.

How to Use It


 Rectangle Tool

A drawing tool that you use to draw rectangles and squares.  If you want perfect squares, press Shift to constrain while drawing.

How to Use It


regression type (def.)
regression type

A predicted value for one variable based on the pattern set by another variable.


results row or column (def.)
results row or column

The row or column in a Worksheet where the results of a formula are placed.  The results row or column is marked by a plus sign (+) at the row or column number or letter.

How to Use It


Return to Slide Show (def.)
 Return to Slide Show

A button that you use to close the Template Editor and return to your slide show.

How to Use It


RGB (def.)
RGB

Red, Green, or Blue.  Basic colors used to customize other colors.

How to Use It


 Right to Left Tool, Organization Chart

An organization chart tool that displays the chart levels with the first level at the right and the last level at the left.

How to Use It


rounded (def.)
rounded

A joint or angle in a line with a rounded corner.

How to Use It


 Rounded Rectangle Tool

A drawing tool that you use to draw rectangles with rounded corners.  If you want to draw rounded boxes with four equal sides, press Shift to constrain while drawing.

How to Use It


row (def.)
row

A horizontal set of cells in a Worksheet.


Ruler (def.)
Ruler

A graphic representation of a ruler that appears on the drawing window to help you place objects in specific locations.  The Ruler does not appear on the printed page.

How to Use It


Run-time (def.)
Run-time

A feature that you use to view WP Presentations slide shows on a computer that does not have a copy of WP Presentations software.  Run-time slide shows are executable only and cannot be edited unless you are in WP Presentations.

How to Use It


saturation (def.)
saturation

The color content, or amount of color, sometimes referred to as a color's brightness.  For example, a high saturation of blue produces a brilliant blue, while a low saturation produces a gray-blue.


Save (def.)
Save

An option on the File menu that stores a document.

How to Use It


Save As (def.)
Save As

An option on the File menu that you use to name or re-name a document, or save it in a different format.

How to Use It


scale (def.)
scale

To increase or decrease the size of a figure or text box.


scatter chart (def.)
scatter chart

A chart whose graph displays a dot or marker at each X, Y point.

How to Use It


 Scatter Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays data as a series of points.

How to Use It


scroll arrows (def.)
scroll arrows

The arrows that appear at either end of a scroll bar.  Mouse users click the scroll arrows to scroll to information.  Keyboard users use the arrow keys to scroll.


scroll bar (def.)
scroll bar

A vertical or horizontal bar that appears on the right side of a window or at the bottom of a window, or both.  The scroll bar contains a scroll arrow at both ends and a scroll box which moves within the scroll bar, manipulating the display position of a document.

How to Use It


scroll box (def.)
scroll box

The box within a scroll bar that you move with the mouse or arrow keys.  Its position in the scroll bar corresponds to the general location in a file or dialog box (beginning, middle, or end).


Search (def.)
Search

A Help feature that you use to find a topic by feature name or keyword.


select object (def.)
select object

To mark, choose, or highlight an object.  You can select several objects at once using the Ctrl key.


 Select Area Tool

A bitmap tool used to define the area within a bitmap image.

How to Use It


select text (def.)
select text

To mark, choose, or highlight a block of text.


 Select Tool

A drawing tool that you use to mark or choose an object.  When an object in the drawing window is selected, small handles surround the object.

How to Use It


Select Model (def.)
Select Model

A feature on the Define Color dialog box that you use to choose RGB, CMYK, or HLS when defining a color.

How to Use It


 Selected Objects Tool

A zoom tool that you use to zoom in on selected objects.

How to Use It


Selective Eraser Tool

A drawing tool that you use to change pixels of one color to another color without affecting the rest of the bitmap image.

How to Use It


series (def.)
series

A row of data in a data chart.

How to Use It


server (application) (def.)
server (application)

An application whose objects can be embedded or linked into other documents.


Shadow (def.)
Shadow

A feature that you use to add a shadow in any color to an object.

How to Use It


shortcut keys (def.)
shortcut keys

A series of keys that perform a specific action; sometimes called accelerator keys or keystrokes.  Shortcut keys are used in place of a mouse.


Reveal Codes (def.)
Reveal Codes

A feature that displays text and formatting codes in the text box so that you can edit or check the placement of codes.

How to Use It


sine (def.)
sine

The ratio between the opposite side and the hypotenuse of the right triangle built on the angle when the source number is expressed as an angle (degrees or radians).

How to Use It


size (def.)
size

To change a selected object or a window by dragging the corners, side handles, or directional arrows arround it.


skew (def.)
skew

To slant a figure or a drawing object.

How to Use It


slide show (def.)
slide show

A series of drawing windows containing communication tools such as charts, bitmaps, text, and drawings presented in slide, transparency, or handout formats.  You can add links, transitions, sound, notes, and titles for each slide.


Slide Sorter (def.)
 Slide Sorter

A feature that you use to see small sketches of your slides together so you can change their order.

How to Use It


Slide Scroll Bar (def.)
Slide Scroll Bar

A horizontal scroll bar that appears at the bottom of the drawing window.  The scroll arrows at both ends of the slider can be clicked to scroll through a presentation.

How to Use It


slider box (def.)
slider box

The box within the Slide Scroll Bar that you move by using the mouse or the arrow keys.  Its position in the Slide Scroll Bar corresponds to your general location in a slide show (beginning, middle, or end).


Snap to Grid (def.)
Snap to Grid

A feature that uses a magnet-like force to align objects you draw, size, or move with grid points in the drawing window.

How to Use It


spooler (def.)
spooler

An application that you use to work while you wait for a document to print.  When you choose Print from the File menu, information is sent immediately to the spooler, and the spooler feeds the information to the printer as soon as the printer is ready.


spreadsheet (def.)
spreadsheet

A grid made up of columns and rows that contain data or formulas.  Spreadsheets are often used for financial planning, cost estimating, and other accounting tasks.


stack (def.)
stack

A bar chart that displays data columns on top of each other, instead of side by side.


 Stacked 100% Tool

A charting tool that displays each piece of data as a percentage of the total of the column it is in.  The percentage figures are stacked for each column to total 100%.

How to Use It


 Stacked Tool

A charting tool that displays the data in each column of a Worksheet as a combined total.  The data that appears from top to bottom in the Worksheet is stacked from bottom to top in the chart.

How to Use It


staff (def.)
staff

A line in an organization chart that links the main organization to an independent function or position.

How to Use It


standard deviation (def.)
standard deviation

The square root of the variance of the values in a series.


startup options (def.)
startup options

Commands you can set to be executed when you start WP Presentations.  These commands are in two categories, some are for your convenience and others are necessary for certain hardware setups.


sticky palette (def.)
sticky palette

A palette that remains on the screen once you select it.  You can display one or more of the available sticky palettes, consisting of Line Styles, Fill Patterns, and Colors.

How to Use It


stream mode (def.)
stream mode

An option that you use to select a notched cross-section of the color palette when you want to blend, rainbow, or find the complement of colors.

How to Use It


stretch (def.)
stretch

To elongate an item in the drawing window by pulling on one of its side handles.

How to Use It


surface chart (def.)
surface chart

A chart that depicts the contour of a landscape.  For example, you can use a surface chart to show the elevations of a mountain range.

How to Use It


 Surface Chart Tool

A charting tool that displays a simulated three-dimensional surface that represents data.

How to Use It


table (def.)
table

A small, two-dimensional list you can display with a chart to describe the values in the chart.

How to Use It


 Table Tool

A charting tool that displays your data in rows and columns instead of as a chart.

How to Use It


template (def.)
template

A page layout, chart, or background format you can use to make different slides look consistent with each other.

How to Use It


Template Editor (def.)
Template Editor

A window with TEMPLATE EDITOR across the bottom of the screen that you use to create or edit templates.  Click here for information on getting into the Template Editor:


Open the Template Editor

To open the Template Editor,

1	Choose Templates from the Edit menu.

2	Choose OK.

To close the Template Editor,

1	Choose Slide Show from the Edit Menu.

The Template Editor appears with TEMPLATE EDITOR on the bottom of the screen.


Template Pop-up List (def.)
 Template Pop-up List

A button that you use to select a template from the current master.

How to Use It


text box (def.)
text box

The space in a dialog box where you type text or where WP Presentations types text for you.

How to Use It


text chart (def.)
text chart

A chart that uses and displays words instead of numerical data.  Text charts include bullet and organization charts.


Text Chart Outliner (def.)
Text Chart Outliner

The lined area in the Chart Editor in which you enter text that appears in text charts.


Text Editor (def.)
Text Editor

A window that you use to create and edit text in a text area or text line.  Click here for information on getting into the Text Editor:


Open the Text Editor

To open the Text Editor,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Text from the Draw or Paint menus.)

2	Drag to create an area large enough for the text.

3	Type your text.

or... Retrieve text from a file or from the Clipboard.

To edit existing text,

1	Select and double-click the text.


 Text Tool

A tool that you use to type or retrieve text into the drawing window.

How to Use It


thumbnail sketch/view (def.)
thumbnail sketch/view

A miniature version of a slide, chart, figure, template, or master.  Galleries and the Slide Sorter use thumbnail sketches to let you view several slides, masters, templates, or figures at once.


tick (def.)
tick

A small line used in data charts to mark off amounts such as dollars, distances, or numbers of items.

How to Use It


tile (def.)
tile

To display open windows side-by-side, without overlapping them.

How to Use It


title bar (def.)
title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of each window that contains the name of the application or window, the Control-menu box, and the Maximize, Minimize, and Restore buttons.  Sometimes the title bar also contains help prompts that give you information about menu items you select.


toggle (def.)
toggle

To turn a feature or option on or off with the same shortcut keys.  For example, press Ctrl+B to turn Bold on, then press Ctrl+B again to turn it off.


tool palette (def.)
tool palette

A small window that contains the drawing, bitmap, or charting tool icons.


 Top to Bottom Tool, Organization Chart

An organization chart tool that displays the chart levels with the first level at the top and the last level at the bottom.  This is the default display.

How to Use It


transition (def.)
transition

The way you move from one slide to another in a slide show.  Transitions are sometimes called screen wipes.

How to Use It


Transparency (def.)
Transparency

An option that you use to make the top or bottom color on fill patterns transparent.

How to Use It


transpose data (def.)
transpose data

This option moves data from columns to rows or rows to columns depending on its original structure.

How to Use It


typeface (def.)
typeface

A specific design of type, such as Courier or Palatino.

How to Use It


vector (def.)
vector

A line segment or curve created with a mathematic equation.  All WP Presentation images (except for bitmaps) are vector images.


vector image (def.)
vector image

A figure created through a series of vector lines.  A vector image is treated as a whole object and cannot be broken down into individual elements (such as a portion of a circle).


vertical alignment (def.)
vertical alignment

The alignment of text or graphics within a defined space, such as a cell or row.  There are three common vertical alignments:  top, bottom, and middle.


window (def.)
window

A space that contains an application, document, dialog box, or message.  A window usually has a Control-menu, a title bar, a menu bar, and Minimize, Maximize, and Restore buttons.

How to Use It


wipe (def.)
wipe

A slide transition that moves from one slide to another using a horizontal or vertical wiping motion.

How to Use It


WordPerfect characters (def.)
WordPerfect Characters

Additional characters, or symbols, included with WordPerfect products.  For example, you can type a bullet, a smart quote, scientific symbols, and international letters using WordPerfect Characters.

How to Use It


Worksheet (def.)
Worksheet

The matrix of rows and columns that is the basic working element in the Chart Editor.  Data you type in the Worksheet appears in the data chart you are creating or editing.


wrap (def.)
wrap

A word processing feature that breaks lines of text automatically to stay within a text area or text line.  The insertion point and any words that extend beyond the margin are carried to the next line.


WPG (def.)
WPG

A file extension added to WP Presentations drawings that represents a WordPerfect graphic.  You can specify a different extension when you save a drawing.  For example, .BMC or .PCX.

How to Use It


X axis (def.)
X axis

The horizontal line of a vertical data chart.  If you are using a horizontal chart, the X axis is a vertical line.

How to Use It


Y axis (def.)
Y axis

The vertical line of a vertical data chart.  If you are using a horizontal chart, the Y axis is a horizontal line.

How to Use It


Y1 and Y2 axes (def.)
Y1 and Y2 axes

The left and right vertical axes in a double-Y data chart.  The Y2 axis lets you chart one or more components on a different scale from the other components.  For example, if you use a bar chart on the Y1 axis to show the income of individual regions over a period of time, you could use a line chart on the Y2 axis to show the total income for all regions during that period.  You would use Y2 because the scale could be as much as four times larger than the Y1 scale.

How to Use It


zoom (def.)
zoom

To enlarge or reduce a specific area of the drawing window, often used for detailed editing.  Zooming does not change the actual size of text or graphics.


 Zoom Area Tool

A zoom tool that you use to magnify a defined area in the drawing window.

How to Use It


Zoom Tool (def.)
 Zoom Tool

A drawing tool that you use to expand or reduce the image of a document or graphic on the screen.  Zooming does not change the actual size of the text or graphics.

How to Use It


How Do I: Bitmaps
Bitmaps

Choose from the following options for information about creating, editing, saving, and retrieving bitmaps.

Bitmap Tools

Create Bitmaps

Edit Bitmaps

Save and Retrieve Bitmaps

Trace Bitmap


How Do I: Create Bitmaps
Create Bitmaps

Choose from the following options for information about creating bitmaps.

Bitmap

Bitmap Attributes

Bitmap Tools


How Do I: Bitmap Attributes
Bitmap Attributes

Choose from the following options for information about selecting brush color, fill, line, and text attributes for your bitmaps.

Brush Attributes

Color Attributes

Fill Attributes

Line Attributes

Text Attributes


How Do I: Edit Bitmaps
Edit Bitmaps

Choose from the following options for information about editing bitmaps.

Bitmap

Bitmap Zoom

Edit a Bitmap

Erase

Select Area

Undo


How Do I: Bitmap Tools
Bitmap Tools

Choose from the following options for information about the specialized tools available in the Bitmap Editor.

Airbrush

Bitmap Tool Palette

Bitmap Zoom

Drawing Tools

Eraser

Flood Fill

Paint Brush

Pickup Color

Select Area

Selective Eraser


How Do I: Save and Retrieve Bitmaps
Save and Retrieve Bitmaps

Choose from the following options for information about saving and retrieving bitmaps.

Cancel

Retrieve

Return

Save


How Do I: Charts
Charts

Choose from the following options for information about creating or editing a chart.

Chart Appearance

Chart Data

Chart Titles, Legends, and Labels

Chart Tool Palettes

Create Charts

Edit Chart

Explode Chart

Redraw Chart

Save and Retrieve Charts

Types of Charts


How Do I: Create Charts
Create Charts

Choose from the following options for information about creating a chart.

Create a Chart

Create or Edit a Worksheet

Move to a Cell

Data Entry


How Do I: Edit Charts
Edit Charts

Choose from the following options for information about editing a chart.

Clear

Copy

Cut

Delete

Edit a Chart

Edit a Worksheet

Edit Cell

Go To Cell

Insert

Paste

Paste Transposed

Select All


How Do I: Types of Charts
Types of Charts

Choose from the following options for information about chart types and how to create them.

Area Chart

Bar Chart

Bullet Chart

Chart Gallery

Hi-Lo Chart

Line Chart

Organization Chart

Pie Chart

Scatter Chart

Surface Chart

Table


How Do I: Bullet Charts
Bullet Charts

Choose from the following options for information about features available only when creating or editing a bullet chart.

Box Attributes

Bullet Chart

Bullet Chart Box Options

Bullet Chart Define Bullets

Bullet Chart Layout


How Do I: Organization Charts
Organization Charts

Choose from the following options for information about features available only when creating or editing an organization chart.

Box Attributes

Organization Chart

Organization Chart Box Options

Organization Chart Connectors

Organization Chart Layout

Organization Chart Set Top

Organization Chart Staff


How Do I: Pie Charts
Pie Charts

Choose from the following options for information about features available only when creating or editing an pie chart.

Box Attributes

Pie Chart

Pie Chart Explode Slice

Pie Chart Layout

Pie Chart Link Pies

Pie Chart Pie Options


How Do I: Chart Data
Chart Data

Choose from the following options for information about manipulating and displaying chart data.

Column Width

Exclude Data

Fill

Format

Formulas

Include Data

Recalculate

Sort

Statistics


How Do I: Chart Data Format
Chart Data Format

Choose from the following options for information about displaying and changing the numeric and date formats in a chart.

Date Format

Format

Numeric Format


How Do I: Chart Data Formulas
Chart Data Formulas

Choose from the following options for information about available formulas and how to apply them to data.

About Formulas

Absolute Value

Average

Cosine

Cumulative Total

Difference

Fit Info

Maximum

Minimum

Moving Average

Percent of Total

Sine

Sum


Fit Info

Use Fit Info to forecast trend lines and regression types.

Fit Exponential

Fit Linear

Fit Log

Fit Polynomial

Fit Power

See Also

Chart Formulas


How Do I: Chart Titles, Legends, And Labels
Chart Titles, Legends, and Labels

Choose from the following options for information about setting and editing chart titles, legends, and labels.

Labels

Legends

Titles


How Do I: Chart Tool Palettes
Chart Tool Palettes

Choose from the following options for information about the specialized tool palettes available only in the Chart Editor.

Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Chart Tool Palette

Organization Chart Tool Palette

Pie Chart Tool Palette

Surface Chart Tool Palette

Table Tool Palette


How Do I: Save and Retrieve Charts
Save and Retrieve Charts

Choose from the following options for information about opening and saving chart data.

Import

Open

Export


How Do I:Chart Appearance
Chart Appearance

Choose from the following options for information about changing the appearance of charts.

Axis

Bullet Chart Layout

Frame

Grid/Tick

Hi-Lo Chart Layout

Layout

Organization Chart Layout

Perspective

Pie Chart Layout

Series

Table/Surface Options


How Do I: Default Settings
Default Settings

Choose from the following options for information about setting defaults:

Backup Default

Computer Default

Date Default

Display Default

Document Default

File Location Default

Font Default

Print Default

Slide Show Default


How Do I: Backup Default
Backup Default

Choose from the following options for information about backing up files:

Location of Backup Files

Preferences Backup


How Do I: Computer Default
Computer Default

Choose from the following options for information about setting language, display, and beep options:

Beep on Error

Beep on Search Failure

Display Shortcut Keys

Language


How Do I: Date Default
Date Default

Choose from the following options for information about adding dates to documents:

Date Format

Edit Date Format

Predefined Dates


How Do I: Display Default
Display Default

Choose from the following options for information about setting screen display defaults:

Auto Select Drawn Item

Crosshair Pointer

Display Grid on Startup

Display Ruler on Startup

Display Sculptured Dialog Boxes

Hide Pointer While Drawing

Snap to Grid Point

Units of Measure


How Do I: Document Default
Document Default

Choose from the following options for information about setting page characteristics:

Margins

Color Options

Page Layout

Page Size

Startup View


How Do I: Print Default
Print Default

Choose from the following options for information about setting print options:

Document Settings

Number of Copies

Print Settings


How Do I: File Location Default
File Location Default

Choose from the following options for information about setting default directories:

Backup Files

Default File Locations

Drawing and Slide Show Files

Figure and Clip Art Files

Keyboard, Button Bar, and Palette Files

Master Template and Gallery Files

Sound Files

Speller and Hyphenation Files


How Do I: Objects
Objects

Choose from the topics below for information about creating, editing, and arranging drawing objects:

Arrange Objects

Drawing Tools

Edit Objects

Object Appearance

Object Attributes

Select Objects


How Do I: Object Attributes
Object Attributes

Choose from the topics below for information about setting color, line, and fill attributes for objects:

Color Attributes

Fill Attributes

Get and Apply Attributes

Line Attributes


How Do I: Arrange Objects
Arrange Objects

Choose from the topics below  for information about arranging objects:

Align Objects

Center Objects

Move and Group Objects

Space Evenly


How Do I: Align Objects
Align Objects

Choose from the topics below for information about aligning objects:

Align

Align, Bottom

Align, Left

Align, Right

Align, Top


How Do I: Center Objects
Center Objects

Choose from the topics below for information about centering objects:

Center Both

Center Left/Right

Center Top/Bottom


How Do I: Move and Group Objects
Move and Group Objects

Choose from the topics below for information about arranging objects:

Back

Backward One

Combine

Contour Text

Flip Left/Right

Flip Top/Bottom

Forward One

Front

Group

Separate

Ungroup


How Do I: Object Apperance
Object Appearance

Choose from the topics below for information about setting and changing the appearance of objects:

Black and White

Get and Apply Attributes

Invert

Outline

Shadows

Silhouette


How Do I: Drawing Tools
Drawing Tools

Choose from the topics below for information about drawing tools:

Arrow

Bezier Curve

Circle

Circular Arc

Closed Curve

Curve

Draw Menu

Ellipse

Elliptical Arc

Freehand

Line

Polygon

Rectangle

Regular Polygon

Rounded Rectangle

Tool Palette


How Do I: Edit Objects
Edit Objects

Choose from the topics below for information about editing objects:

Copy

Cut

Delete

Duplicate

Edit an Object

Insert Object

Paste

Redo

Rotate

Select

Skew

Stretch and Size Objects

Undo


How Do I: Select Objects
Select Objects

Choose from the topics below for information about selecting objects:

Select

Select All

Select Item

Select Like


How Do I

Choose from the following How Do I options to find information about performing tasks:

Bitmaps

Button Bars

Charts

Dates

Default Settings

Figures

Files

Keyboards

Objects

Print

Save and Retrieve

Slide Shows

Sound

Templates

Text


How Do I: Button Bars
Button Bars

Choose from the following options for more information about button bars:

Button Bar

Button Bar Edit

Button Bar New

Button Bar Options

Button Bar Save As

Button Bar Select

Button Bar Setup


How Do I: Dates
Dates

Choose from the following options for information about adding dates to a slide show, slide, graphic or chart:

Date

Date Code

Date Format

Date Text


How Do I: Figures
Figures

Choose from the following options for information about finding and retrieving the clip art that comes with WP Presentations:

Edit a Figure

Figure

Figure Gallery

Import

Retrieve


How Do I: Files
Files

Choose from the following options for information about managing files:

Copy, Delete, and Move Files

File Info

File Manager

File Menus

Files List

Find Files

Location of Files

Retrieve

Save


How Do I: File Menus
File Menus

Choose from the following options for more information about the file menus in the different WP Presentations Editors:

Bitmap File Menu

Chart File Menu

File Menu


How Do I: Copy, Delete, And Move Files
Copy, Delete, and Move Files

Choose from the following options for information about manipulating files:

Copy File

Delete File

Move/Rename File


How Do I: Keyboards
Keyboards

Choose from the following options for information about selecting, customizing, and using keyboards in WP Presentations:

Customize a Keyboard

Select a Keyboard

Use a Keyboard in WP Presentations


How Do I: Customize a Keyboard
Customize a Keyboard

Choose from the following options for information about customizing keyboards:

Allow Reassigning of a,b,c ... 1,2,3 ...

Home Key Works Like DOS WP 5.1

Keyboard Editor

Keystrokes Assigned to Item


How Do I: Use a Keyboard in WP Presentations
Use a Keyboard in WP Presentations

Choose from the following options for information about using a keyboard in WP Presentations:

Dialog Boxes

Draw Objects

Keyboard Information

Menus

Shortcut Keys


How Do I: Select a Keyboard
Select a Keyboard

Choose from the following options for information about selecting a keyboard:

Default (CUA) Keyboard Layout

Default Keyboard

Select Keyboard Layout


How Do I: Print
Print

Choose from the following options for more information about printing:

Print Document Options

Print Layout

Print Setup


How Do I: Print Document Options
Print Document Options

Choose from the following options for more information about printing specific documents:

Current View

Full Document

Handouts

Print Selected Objects

Range of Pages

Slide List

Slides

Speaker Notes


How Do I: Print Layout
Print Layout

Choose from the following options for information about setting the appearance of printed pages:

Binding Offset

Margins

Number of Copies

Page Numbers

Page Size

Preferences Print

Quality


How Do I: Slide Shows
Slide Shows

Choose from the following options for information about creating, editing, and playing slides and slide shows:

Add Slide

Delete Slide

Organize a Slide Show

Play a Slide Show

Slide Links

Slide Sound

Slide Templates

Slide Title

Slide Transitions

Speaker Notes


How Do I: Slide Transitions
Slide Transitions

Choose from the following options for information about adding or overriding transitions:

Slide Override

Slide Transitions


How Do I: Play a Slide Show
Play a Slide Show

Choose from the following options for information about playing a slide show.

Make Run-time

Show Run-time

Play Slide Show


How Do I: Slide Templates
Slide Templates

Choose from the following options for information about adding or creating templates:

Add Template

Delete Template

Edit Template

Link Templates

Master Gallery

Master Template

Name Template


How Do I: Organize a Slide Show
Organize a Slide Show

Choose from the following options for information about organizing slides for slide shows:

Slide Show

Slide Show List

Slide Show Outliner

Slide Sorter


How Do I: Sound
Sound

Choose from the following options for information about adding, creating, and editing sound:

CD-Audio

Digital Sound

MIDI

Slide Sound

Sound Options


How Do I: Digital Sound
Digital Sound

Choose from the following options for information about adding, creating, and editing digital sound:

Digital Audio

Record Digital Sound


How Do I: Text
Text

Choose from the following options for information about creating, editing, and setting the appearance of text:

Advance

Bold

Date

Fonts and Characters

Italic

Justification

Layout

Normal Text

Outline Text

Search and Replace

Speller

Text Position

Titles (Chart)

Text Attributes

Underline


How Do I: Fonts And Characters
Fonts and Characters

Choose from the following options for information about using fonts and WordPerfect characters:

Font

WordPerfect Characters


How Do I: Outline Text
Outline Text

Choose from the following options for information about making text outlines:

Define Paragraph Numbering

Outline

Outline On/Off

Paragraph Number


How Do I: Text Position
Text Position

Choose from the following options for information about positioning text:

Advance

Center Text

Flush Right

Indent

Justification

Back Tab


Index

                          Glossary

Use the Index to find information about features.  Select one of the buttons to move to a portion of the index.

To display a Help topic,

1	Click the underlined word you want.

A

About WP Presentations

Absolute Value

Acquire Image

Actual Size (1:1)

Add Printer

Add or Edit Quick List

Add Slide

Add Template

Adjust Image

Adjust Image to Print Black and White

Advance, Slide Transition

Advance, Text

Air Brush

Align

Align Bottom

Align Left

Align Right

Align Top

Alignment Guides

Alike, Select

All, Select

Allow Reassigning of a,b,c...1,2,3

Alphanumeric Keys, Reassign

Application Control-menu Box

Application Maximize Button

Application Minimize Button

Application Window

Apply Attributes

Arc, Elliptical

Arc, Circular

Area Chart

Area, Zoom

Arrange Menu

Arrow

Arrow, Curved

Arrow, Double-Curved

Attributes, Brush

Attributes, Fill

Attributes, Get and Apply

Attributes, Line

Attributes Menu

Attributes Menu, Bitmap

Auto Redraw

Auto Select Drawn Item

Average

Axis, Chart

B

Back

Back Button

Back Tab

Backup

Backup Files

Backup, Preferences

Backward One

Bar Chart

Beep On Error

Beep On Search Failure

Beep Options

Bezier Curve

Binding Offset, Print

Bitmap

Bitmap Attributes Menu

Bitmap Clear

Bitmap Edit Menu

Bitmap File Menu

Bitmap Menus

Bitmap Paint Menu

Bitmap Tool Palette

Bitmap, Trace

Bitmap, Undo

Bitmap View Menu

Bitmap Zoom

Black and White

Blend

Bold

Box Attributes

Box Options, Bullet Chart

Browse Buttons

Brush Attributes

Bullets

Bullet Chart

Bullet Chart Options Box Options

Bullet Chart Options Define Bullets

Bullet Chart Options Layout

Bullet Chart Options Menu

Bullet Chart Tool Palette

Button Bar

Button Bar Edit

Button Bar New

Button Bar Options

Button Bar Save As

Button Bar Select

Button Bar Setup

C

Cancel, Bitmap and Chart

Cascade

CD Audio

Cell, Go To

Cell, Move To

Center Both

Center Left/Right

Center Text

Center Top/Bottom

Change Default Directory

Change Label Positions on a Chart

Characters, WP

Chart Menu

Chart Menus

Chart Only

Chart Options Menu

Chart, Area

Chart Axis

Chart, Bar

Chart, Bullet

Chart Clear

Chart Clear Data

Chart Copy

Chart Cut

Chart Data Column Width

Chart Data Date Format

Chart Data Fill

Chart Data Format

Chart Data Formulas

Chart Data Menu

Chart Data Numeric Format

Chart Data Recalculate

Chart Data Sort

Chart Data Statistics

Chart Edit Menu

Chart Export (Worksheet)

Chart File Menu

Chart Frame

Chart Gallery

Chart Grid/Tick

Chart Hi-Lo

Chart Import (Spreadsheet)

Chart Import (Worksheet)

Chart Insert

Chart Labels

Chart Layout

Chart Legend

Chart, Line

Chart, Organization

Chart Paste

Chart Perspective

Chart, Pie

Chart, Redraw

Chart, Scatter

Chart Select All

Chart Series

Chart Style

Chart, Surface

Chart Table/Surface Options

Chart Titles

Chart Titles Options

Chart Tool Palette

Chart View Menu

Chart Window Menu

Circle

Circular Arc

Clear, Bitmap

Clear Chart

Clear Data

Clear Screen

Close, Bitmap and Chart

Close, Document

Close, Document Window

Closed Curve

Color Attributes

Color Model

Color Palette, Define

Color Palette, Retrieve

Color Palette, Save

Column, Delete

Column, Insert

Column Width (Chart)

Combine

Contour Text

Convert to Slide Show

Copies, Print

Copy

Copy and Paste Colors

Copy, Chart

Copy File

Cosine

Create a Chart

Create a Quick File

Create a QuickList

Create a Worksheet

Create Objects, Draw

Create or Edit Keyboard

Crosshair

Crosshair Pointer

Cumulative Total

Current Directory

Current Printer

Current View, Print

Cursor, Hide While Drawing

Curve

Curved Arrow

Cut

Cut, Chart

D

Data and Chart

Data Entry

Data Fill, Chart

Data Format, Chart

Data Formula, Chart

Data Only

Date

Date Code

Date Format

Date Text

Default (CUA) Keyboard Layout

Default Directory, Change

Default Document Type

Default Font

Define Bullets, Bullet Chart

Define Color Palette

Define Paragraph Numbering

Delete

Delete Cell

Delete File

Delete Rows or Columns

Delete Slide

Delete Template

Detach

Dialog Box

Difference

Digital Audio

Digital Sound, Record

Directories List

Directory, Current

Display

Display Grid on Startup

Display Last Open Filenames

Display Page Colors

Display Pointer Position

Display Position

Display, Preferences

Display Ruler on Startup

Display Sculptured Dialog Boxes

Display Selected Objects

Display Shortcut Keys

Document, Close

Document on Disk, Print

Document Type, Default

Document Window

Document Window, Close

Double-Curved Arrow

Draft Mode

Draw Create Objects

Draw Menu

Draw Objects, Keyboard

Drawing Area

Drawing/Slide Show Files

Duplicate

E

Edit

Edit a Bitmap

Edit a Chart

Edit a Figure

Edit a Template

Edit a Worksheet

Edit an Object

Edit Button Bar

Edit Cell

Edit Format

Edit Menu

Edit Menu, Bitmap

Edit Menu, Chart

Edit Quick List

Edit Slide Links

Edit, Slide Show

Edit Gallery

Effects

Ellipse

Elliptical Arc

Entering Worksheet Data

Environment

Erase

Eraser

Error, Beep On

Evenly, Space

Exclude Row/Column

Exit

Explode Chart

Explode Slice

F

Figure

Figure Gallery

Figure Other File

Figure Retrieve

Figure Save As WPG

Figure/Clip Art Files

File, Copy

File, Delete

File, Find

File Info

File, Insert

File, Location Of

File Manager

File Menu

File Menu, Bitmap

File, Open

File Options

File, View

Filename Text Box

Files List

Fill Attributes

Fill Attributes Gradient

Fill Attributes Pattern

Find Files

Fit Info

Flip Left/Right

Flip Top/Bottom

Flood Fill

Flush Right

Font

Font, Default

Format, Save to Another

Formats, Date

Formulas

Forward One

Frame, Chart Options

Freehand

Front

Full Document, Print

Full Page

G

Gallery Edit

Gallery Options

Generated By, Print

Get and Apply Attributes

Glossary

Go To

Go To Cell

Gradient

Gradient, Fill Attributes

Gradient Page Color

Grid

Grid Options

Grid/Snap Options

Grid/Tick, Chart Options

Group

H

Handouts, Print

Help Menu

Hi-Lo Chart

Hi-Lo Chart Layout

Hide Pointer While Drawing

Highlighter

History Button

Home Key Works Like WP DOS 5.1

How Do I...

I

Image, Adjust

Image Source Setup

Import Master

Import Worksheet

In, Zoom

Include Row/Column

Indent

Insert File

Insert Object

Insert

Invert

Italic

Item, Select

J

Justification

K

Keyboard

Keyboard Dialog Boxes

Keyboard Draw Objects

Keyboard Editor

Keyboard Information

Keyboard Layout, Default

Keyboard Layout, Select

Keyboard Menus

Keyboard Options

Keyboard, Preferences

Keyboard/Button Bar/Palette Files

Keystrokes Assigned to Items

L

Labels, Chart Options

Labels, Pie Chart

Language

Last Open Filenames, Display

Layout, Text

Layout, Chart

Layout, Keyboard

Layout, Page

Legend, Chart Options

License Number

Line

Line Attributes

Line Chart

Link Pies

Link Templates

Links

List, Files

List, Slide Show

Location of Files

M

Make Run-time

Margins

Margins, Print

Master Gallery

Master Import

Master Template List

Master/Gallery Files

Maximize

Maximum

Menu, Arrange

Menu, Attributes

Menu Bar

Menu, Bitmap

Menus

MIDI Song

Minimize

Minimum

Modify Cell

Move

Move/Rename File

Moving Average

Moving to a Cell

Multiple Copies, Print

N

Name Template

New

New Button Bar

Next

Normal Text

Number of Copies, Default

Number of Copies, Print

Number of Notes Per Page, Print

Number of Slides Per Page, Print

Numeric Format, Chart

O

Object, Edit

Object, Rotate

Objects, Selected

Open File

Open (Worksheet), Chart

Options, Button Bar

Options, Gallery

Options, Sound

Organization Chart

Organization Chart Box Options

Organization Chart Connectors

Organization Chart Layout

Organization Chart Options Menu

Organization Chart Set Top

Organization Chart Staff

Organization Chart Tool Palette

Other File, Figure

Out, Zoom

Outline

Outline On or Outline Off

Outline Text

Outliner, Slide Show

Override, Slide

P

Page Color

Page Layout

Page Numbers, Print

Page Size

Paint Brush

Paint Menu, Bitmap

Palettes

Paper Size/Margins, Print

Paper Size, Print

Paragraph Number

Paste

Paste Colors, Copy and

Paste Special

Paste Transposed

Paste, Chart

Pattern, Fill Attributes

Percent of Total

Perspective, Chart Options

Pickup Color

Pie Chart

Pie Chart Appearance

Pie Chart Explode Slice

Pie Chart Labels

Pie Chart Layout

Pie Chat Link Pies

Pie Chart Pie Options

Pie Chart Tool Palette

Pie Options

Play Run-time

Play Slide Show

Pointer Position, Display

Points, Edit

Polygon

Pop-up Menu

Position Display

Poster

Preferences

Preferences Backup

Preferences Display

Preferences Environment

Preferences Keyboard

Preferences Location of Files

Preferences Print

Preferences Slide Show

Preview Print Job

Preview Template

Preview Transitions

Previous View

Print

Print Binding Offset

Print Current Printer

Print Current View

Print Document on Disk

Print, Document Options

Print Full Document

Print Generated By

Print Handouts

Print Margins

Print Multiple Copies

Print Number of Copies

Print Number of Notes Per Page

Print Number of Slides Per Page

Print Options, Default

Print Page Numbers

Print Paper Size

Print Paper Size/Margins

Print, Preferences

Print Range

Print Selected Objects

Print Settings, Default

Print Setup

Print Slide List

Print Slides

Print Speaker Notes

Print View

Printer, Select

Q

Quick File, Create

Quick Files

QuickList

QuickList, Create

QuickFinder Index

R

Range, Print

Reassign Alphanumeric Keys

Recalculate, Chart

Record Digital Sound

Rectangle

Redo

Redraw Chart

Regular Polygon

Rename, File

Replace, Search and

Restore

Results, Search

Retrieve Color Palette

Retrieve, Figure

Retrieve Style

Retrieve Text

Reveal Codes

Rotate

Rounded Rectangle

Rows or Columns, Delete

Rows or Columns, Insert

Ruler

Run Show

Run-time, Make

S

Save

Save As

Save As, Button Bar

Save As WPG, Figure

Save Color Palette

Save in Bitmap Format

Save Slide List Layout on Exit

Save Style

Save to Another Format

Scatter Chart

Scroll Bar

Search

Search and Replace

Search Button

Search Failure, Beep On

Search Results

Searching Message Box

Select

Select All

Select All (Chart)

Select Area

Select Button Bar

Select Directory

Select Drawn Item, Auto

Select Item

Select Keyboard Layout

Select Like

Select Printer

Selected Objects, Display

Selected Objects, Print

Selected Objects, Zoom

Selection Options

Selective Eraser

Separate

Series, Chart Options

Setup, Button Bar

Setup, Print

Shadow Attributes

Shortcut Keys

Shortcut Keys, Display

Show Grid on Startup

Show Ruler on Startup

Silhouette

Sine

Size

Size Objects

Skew

Slide, Add

Slide, Delete

Slide Editor Button

Slide Editor, Slide Show

Slide Links

Slide Links Change

Slide List Button

Slide List Layout, Save on Exit

Slide List, Print

Slide, Master

Slide Menu

Slide Override

Slide, Presentation

Slide, Print

Slide Scroll Bar

Slide Show, Edit Menu

Slide Show List

Slide Show Menus

Slide Show Outliner

Slide Show, Play

Slide Show, Preferences

Slide Show Slide Editor

Slide Show Slides

Slide Show, View

Slide Show, Window

Slide Sorter

Slide Sound

Slide Template

Slide Template Apply to

Slide Template Detach

Slide Template Display Page Colors

Slide Template Previous Template

Slide Title

Slide Transition

Slide Transition Advance

Slides, Print

Snap to Grid

Snap to Grid Option

Snap to Grid Point

Snap Zone Option

Solid Page Color

Sort, Chart

Sound

Sound Clip Files

Sound Options

Sound, Record

Space Evenly

Speaker Notes

Speaker Notes, Print

Speller

Speller/Hyphenation Files

Startup View

Startup, Display Ruler

Statistics, Chart

Status Area

Straighten Text

Stretch Objects

Style, Chart

Sum

Surface Chart

Surface Chart Tool Palette

Switch To

T

Table

Table Tool Palette

Table/Surface Options

Template, Add

Template, Delete

Template, Link

Template, Master

Template Menu

Template, Name

Template, Preview

Template, Slide

Templates

Text

Text and Chart

Text Attributes

Text Attributes Pattern

Text Attributes Gradient

Text, Bold

Text, Center

Text, Contour

Text, Date

Text, Indent

Text, Italic

Text Line

Text, Margin Release

Text Menu

Text, Normal

Text Only

Text, Outline

Text, Outline On or Outline Off

Text, Retrieve

Text, Straighten

Text Window

Tile

Title, Slide

Titles, Chart

Titles, Options

Tool Palette

Tool Palette, Bitmap

Tool Palette, Bullet Chart

Tool Palette, Chart

Tool Palette, Organization Chart

Tool Palette, Pie Chart

Trace Bitmap

Transitions, Preview

Transitions, Slide Options

U

Underline

Undo

Undo, Bitmap

Ungroup

Units of Measure

Using Help

V

View File

View Menu

View Menu, Bitmap

View Menu, Chart

View, Previous

View, Print

View, Slide Show

View, Startup

W

Window Menu

Window Menu, Chart

Window Slide Show

WPG, Save Figure As

WordPerfect Character Number

WordPerfect Characters

Words, Find

Worksheet, Create or Edit

Worksheet, Edit

Worksheet, Import

X

X Center

Y

Y Center

Z

Zoom

Zoom Area

Zoom In

Zoom Out


 Hint

Some items may be superimposed.  If you do not want them to overlap, select and drag the items to arrange them.


 Hint

You can choose Reset to restore the original color palette.


 Hint

Each part of the bitmap becomes an individual object after conversion.  To move, copy, size or rotate the image as a single object, select the entire image, then choose Group from the Arrange menu.


 Hint

Each part of the chart becomes an individual object after exploding.  To manipulate the chart as a whole, select all chart objects then choose Group from the Arrange menu.


 Hint

The text wraps around the form of the drawing object.  If the text is too long to fit on the object, it follows the same slope or angle it is at when it reaches the end of the object.

Select the contoured text and drag to position it where you want it.


 Hint

The arrowheads will only appear on lines drawn using the Line Tool.


 Hint

When you have selected an item, you may press the right mouse button to view a pop-up menu.  Choose Front from the pop-up menu.


 Hint

When you have selected an item, you may press the right mouse button to view a pop-up menu.  Choose Back from the pop-up menu.


 Hint

Grouped objects are treated as one object as you are editing, but the individual objects retain their original attributes.  Combined objects are also treated as one object, but the new objects take on the attributes of the first object.


 Hint

The item will be flipped from its center point and be mirrored from the left to right.  Choose Flip Left/Right again to restore the item to its original position.

Pressing Ctrl while choosing Flip Left/Right creates a duplicate of the object and flips it, leaving the original unchanged.


 Hint

The item will be flipped from its center point and be mirrored from the top to bottom.  Choose Flip Top/Bottom again to restore the item to its original position.

Pressing Ctrl while choosing Flip Top/Bottom creates a duplicate of the object and flips it, leaving the original unchanged.


 Hint

The display box shows an example line of text.


 Hint

If an object has no border or outline, it will be invisible after using Outline.  However, the parts of the invisible object that overlap other objects will be visible against them.


 Hint

To select multiple handles, press Ctrl while you click on the handles you want to select.


 Hint

If you were editing a bitmap image or chart and choose Cancel, the bitmap image or chart reappears without the changes.


 Hint

When you create a chart, the tool palette changes to include tools for these tasks.


 Hint

Choose Options to change the way the galleries in WP Presentations display.


 Hint

The Chart menu lets you switch to a different chart type.


 Hint

If you press the space bar instead of Backspace, the cell appears empty, but it still contains a space.


 Hint

Choose Redraw from the View menu or choose the Redraw button to display the chart.


 Hint

Another way to select every cell is to click the blank gray cell at the top left corner of the Worksheet.


 Hint

You can choose Preview at any time to view your changes without closing the dialog box.


 Hint

Reset Distance to zero to return the slice to its original position.


 Hint

The word Staff appears in the left column of the outline, showing that this title is now a staff position.

To turn off the Staff feature, choose Staff again.


 Hint

You can constrain the area you are defining for the bitmap by holding down the Shift key while dragging.

You can create the bitmap area from a center point by holding down the Alt key while dragging.

You can reposition the bitmap area while defining it by holding down both the left and the right mouse buttons.


 Hint

When you create a chart or bitmap image, the tool palette changes to include tools for these tasks.


 Hint

The figure is proportionally sized to fit the defined area.


 Hint

Before using this tool, you can set the brush attributes for the Air Brush by choosing Brush from the Attributes menu, making changes, then choosing OK.


 Hint

You can change the foreground and background colors for the Air Brush by choosing Color from the Attributes menu, making changes to the foreground and background colors, then choosing OK.

You can change the fill pattern by choosing [image] from the tool palette, then selecting the desired pattern.


 Hint

Before using this tool, you can set the brush attributes for the Eraser by choosing Brush from the Attributes menu, making changes to the attributes, then choosing OK.


 Hint

Use [image] to erase only one color in a bitmap image and replace it with a different foreground color.


 Hint

Before using this tool, you can set the brush attributes for the Paint Brush by choosing Brush from the Attributes menu, making changes to the attributes, then choosing OK.


 Hint

Some colors are a mixture of different color pixels.  The color you pick up depends on what pixel you are on when you click.


 Hint

Before using this tool, you can set the brush attributes for the Selective Eraser by choosing Brush from the Attributes menu, making changes to the attributes, then choosing OK.


 Hint

In the Bitmap Editor the Draw menu changes to the Paint menu.  The Paint menu includes most of the tools listed above, plus additional tools for creating and editing bitmap images.


 Hint

Some of the items that appear on the Pop-up Menu change according to the object you want to edit.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the curve by holding down both the right and left mouse buttons and moving the pointer.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the curve, or press Backspace to remove the most recent anchor point.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the closed curve by holding down both the right and left mouse buttons and moving the pointer.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the closed curve, or press Backspace to remove the most recent anchor point.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the freehand line by holding down both the right and left mouse buttons and moving the pointer.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the line.


 Hint

To constrain the bézier curve angles to 45 degrees, hold down Shift as you begin dragging.


 Hint

To create a cusp, hold down the Alt key as you begin dragging.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the bézier curve by holding down the right mouse button and moving the pointer.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the curve, or press Backspace to remove the most recent anchor point.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the arrow by holding down the right mouse button and moving the pointer.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the arrow.


 Hint

You can hold down the Shift key to constrain the direction of the tail to a multiple of 45 degrees.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the curved arrow by holding down the right mouse button and moving the pointer.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the double-curved arrow by holding down the right mouse button and moving the pointer.


 Hint

When you are drawing, you can press Backspace to delete the previous point in a bent or zigzag line.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the line by holding down both the right and left mouse buttons and moving the pointer.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the line, or press Backspace to remove the most recent anchor point.


 Hint

While drawing, you can constrain the direction of the lines to multiples of 45 degrees by holding down the Shift key.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the polygon by holding down the right mouse button and moving the pointer.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the polygon, or press Backspace to remove the most recent anchor point.


 Hint

For example, type 3 to create a triangle.

The Regular Polygon dialog box will disappear when you choose another tool from the tool palette or when you choose another item from a menu.  You can also close the dialog box by double-clicking on its control box.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the polygon.


 Hint

While drawing, hold down the right mouse button to reposition the rectangle.

While drawing, hold down Shift to constrain the rectangle to a square.

While drawing, hold down Alt to expand the rectangle from a center point.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the rectangle.


 Hint

While drawing, hold down the right mouse button to reposition the rounded rectangle.

While drawing, hold down Shift to constrain the rounded rectangle to a square.

While drawing, hold down Alt to expand the rounded rectangle from a center point.


 Hint

While drawing, hold down the right mouse button to reposition the ellipse.

While drawing, hold down the Shift key to constrain the ellipse to a circle.

While drawing, hold down the Alt key to expand the ellipse from a center point.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the ellipse.


 Hint

While drawing, hold down the right mouse button to reposition the elliptical arc.

While drawing, hold down the Shift key to constrain the elliptical arc to a circular arc.

While drawing, hold down the Alt key to invert the elliptical arc.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the arc.


 Hint

While drawing, hold down the right mouse button to reposition the circle.

While drawing, hold down the Alt key to expand the circle from the beginning anchor point.


 Hint

You can press ESC to cancel the circle.


 Hint

While drawing, hold down Shift to constrain the arc angle to a multiple of 45 degrees.


 Hint

While drawing, you can reposition the circular arc by holding down both the right and left mouse buttons and moving the pointer.


 Hint

Alt+Tab switches to other open applications.


 Hint

To activate a window or move to another window, click the title bar.


 Hint

To cancel Exit and return to the current document, choose Cancel in the WP Presentations dialog box.


 Hint

The number of the current slide appears in the text to the right of the Slider.  By knowing the approximate number of the desired slide, you can determine where you need to scroll in order to locate the slide.


 Hint

To maximize one of the cascaded windows, click the document maximize button found on the title bar of the window you want to maximize.


 Hint

To maximize a tiled window, click the maximize button on the title bar of the window you want to maximize.


 Hint

To maximize a cascaded or tiled window, click the maximize button on the title bar of the window you want to maximize.


 Hint

Once the object is placed, you can make changes to it by double-clicking the object, making the desired changes, and repeating steps 4 and 5.


 Hint

Another way to duplicate an item is to select the item, then while pressing Ctrl, drag to the location you want to place the duplicated item.  When you release the mouse button, the duplicated item appears.


 Hint

Use the Ctrl key while selecting an item to select multiple items.


 Hint

Press Shift to constrain the rotation angle to 45 degrees.


 Hint

Press Ctrl to make a copy of the object to rotate, leaving the original.


 Hint

If you drag one of the corner handles, you will rotate the item.


 Hint

Press Ctrl while skewing an item to make a skewed copy of the item.

Press Alt while skewing to anchor the item in its center rather than on its side.


 Hint

Place the pointer on any item and press the right mouse button to display a Pop-up Menu of editing options.


 Hint

Click [image] from the tool palette, then click once in the drawing window to see the gallery display with the new category.


 Hint

You can also use the Slide Scroll bar to move directly to a slide.


 Hint

The Beep on Error option is selected when you install WP Presentations, and the Beep on Search Failure option is deselected.


 Hint

File Manager is a stand-alone application; you can run it under Windows without running WP Presentations, or you can run it from WP Presentations.  If you want more information about File Manager, follow the steps listed above, then press F1 for Help after File Manager opens.


 Hint

Retrieving a graphics file by choosing Open from the File menu disables the slide show mode.  Convert to Slide Show converts a single image to a slide in a slide show and restores the slide show mode.


 Hint

At extremes of brightness, warmth, and contrast, objects will seem to disappear against the background, but they are still there.


 Hint

You can size, rotate, and skew the image, or take it to the Bitmap Editor and edit it as a bitmap.


 Hint

The name of the current directory appears next to Current Dir.  If you want to change directories, select one from the Directories list box, or select the Quick List check box.


 Hint

You can change to a drive or directory by selecting the one you want.  Directories appear in brackets, such as [prwin].  Drives are listed below the directories, and also appear in brackets, such as [c].  To move to the parent directory, choose [..] at the top of the Directories list.


 Hint

Delete will not delete a subdirectory or subdirectory structure by specifying the subdirectory name.  Use File Manager for more extensive delete capabilities.


 Hint

Copy will not create a destination directory if you specify one that does not exist.  Wildcards cannot be used with the Copy option.  Use File Manager for more extensive copy capabilities.


 Hint

Use File Manager for more extensive move capabilities.


 Hint

If you want to continue searching, choose Find Files.


 Hint

To hide the Ruler temporarily, choose Ruler from the View menu.  Choose Ruler from the View menu again when you want to turn it back on.


 Hint

To turn off the Grid temporarily, choose Grid from the View menu.  Choose Grid from the View menu again when you want to turn it back on.


 Hint

To turn off the Snap to Grid Point option temporarily, choose Snap to Grid from the View menu.  Choose Snap to Grid from the View menu again when you want to turn it back on.


 Hint

To temporarily turn off the Crosshair Pointer, choose Crosshair from the View menu.  Choose Crosshair from the View menu again when you want to turn it back on.


 Hint

You can set the Status Bar Display and the Display and Entry of Numbers to different units of measure.  For example, choosing inches for the Status Bar Display lets you know your relative position on the paper.  Choosing to use points for Display and Entry of Numbers lets you enter precise measurements in dialog boxes.


 Hint

To turn off the position display temporarily, choose Position Display from the View menu.  Choose Position Display from the View menu again when you want to turn it back on.


 Hint

If you do not specify a Backup directory, WP Presentations saves all backup files in the directory where WP Presentations program files are located.


 Hint

Original document backup files are stored in the same directory as the original file.  Location of Files does not affect them.


 Hint

Current View prints only what is shown on your screen.  For example, if your document is in Zoom In view, Current View prints only the portion of your document that is currently showing on the screen.


 Hint

You can change the Paper Size/Margins, Page Numbers, and Number of Slides Per Page.


 Hint

You can print the same number of copies every time you print by changing the Print Settings in Preferences.


 Hint

If you want to change Generated By for all new documents, choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Print.  Make your changes and choose OK, then choose Close.


 Hint

If you want to change the Binding Offset for all new documents, choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Print.  Make your changes and choose OK, then choose Close.


 Hint

If you are printing to a laser printer and your drawing does not print completely, your printer may not have enough memory.


 Hint

You can return to the Print dialog box from View by clicking anywhere on the screen.


 Hint

Function keys can be assigned with or without modifier keys.


 Hint

You can also Return the Chart Editor and Save your chart from the main File menu.


 Hint

You can modify existing shortcut keys or create new ones using the Keyboard Editor.


 Hint

You can also use the arrow keys to move from menu to menu, then press Enter to choose a highlighted option.


 Hint

You can move from option to option in the dialog box using the Tab key, then press the space bar to modify radio buttons and check boxes, or to open pop-up lists.

Radio buttons are selected or deselected.

Check boxes are selected or deselected.

Text boxes are selected so you can type information.

Pop-up lists are selected, and pressing the space bar opens them.


 Hint

While you are working on a complicated task or learning WP Presentations, it is helpful to reduce the size of the application window and the Help window to fit side by side.


 Hint

When using Slide Links you will want to advance your slides manually.  To select advance features, use Slide Transition from the Slide menu.


 Hint

You can remove a current slide definiton if you highlight the entry in the Key List text box, then choose Remove.


 Hint

Your slide show is stored as two files, one with a .SHW extension and one with a .PRQ extension.  If you want to rename your slide show, be sure to rename both files and keep the file extensions the same.


 Hint

Once you change your options, that change remains in effect for all galleries.


 Hint

If you want your slide show to repeat continuously, select Repeat Slide Show.  Press ESC to discontinue your slide show.


 Hint

Slides from a quick file appear on the screen with no delay time, instead of being redrawn each time they are shown.  However, quick files are very large and use far more memory than regular slide show files.


 Hint

If you change any part of the slide show, you will have to re-create the Quick File.


 Hint

Drag the highlighter across text or areas of the slides during the slide show.  The highlight appears where you drag, but does not permanently mark your slide.

If you click the mouse button without dragging, the slide show will advance to the next slide when you have Advance set to Manual.  Clicking the left mouse button takes you back one slide, and clicking the right mouse button takes you forward one slide.


 Hint

The Windows Sound Recorder has its own Help system.  If you need further instructions on recording or modifying digital sound, refer to your Windows manual.


 Hint

You can use the Reset button to cancel all changes.


 Hint

The Template format (page color, charts, text boxes, etc.) now becomes part of the slide.  You can now edit objects and colors within the template (change the colors, move objects in the template, etc.).

Any objects that were drawn in the slide now appear behind any Template objects.  Use the options on the Arrange menu to make them visible.


 Hint

View other slide templates in your slide show by clicking them in the Template list.


 Hint

In the Chart Editor, you must be in a Bullet or Organization Chart to see the Text menu.


 Hint

While the text area or text line is open, you can choose text menu options to control the appearance, content, and layout of the text.  With the text area selected, you can also resize it.


 Hint

The date format you chose is now displayed in the Edit Format text box.  The predefined date formats are explained below.

April 7, 1992   (Month Date, Year)

Apr 7, 1993   (Abbreviated-Month Date, Year)

7 April 1993   (Date Month Year)

Wednesday, April 7, 1993   (Weekday, Month Date, Year)

Wednesday, 7 April 1993   (Weekday, Date Month Year)

4/7/93   (Month/Date/Year Digits)

If you need a date format that is not in the Formats list box, you can create a custom format by placing date and time codes from the Date Codes and Time Codes pop-up lists in the Edit Format text box.


 Hint

You can see an example of your font selection in the display window.


 Hint

If the Speller finds a problem with your document, you have several options available.  Use Speller's Help while spell-checking for detailed help on the available Speller options.

You can edit your WordPerfect document without closing the Speller.  To do this, click anywhere in the drawing window.  You can then return to the Speller by clicking in the Speller application window.


 Hint

If you know the character number, you can type it directly into the Number text box.


 Hint

You can delete, copy, move, rename, or find Button Bar files by choosing an option from Options pop-up list and selecting the command you want.


 Hint

Draft mode changes your view of drawn objects on your screen, but it does not change the actual objects when printed or used in a slide show.


 Hint

To view another slide, use the Slider at the bottom of the screen.


 Hint

To place a blank line between slide titles, press Enter twice.


 Hint

To return to the current slide, click [image] at the bottom of the screen.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the View menu, then choose Slide Editor.)


 Hint

You can display only the codes on the line of text where the insertion point is located.

To turn off Reveal Codes, choose Reveal Codes from the View menu again.


 Hint

The grid does not appear on the printed page.

Another way to display or remove the grid is to choose Grid from the View menu.


 Hint

Snap to Grid works whether or not the grid is displayed.

Another way to turn Snap to Grid on or off is to choose Snap to Grid from the View menu.


 Hint

The alignment guides do not appear on the printed page.

You can have up to 31 vertical and 31 horizontal alignment guides.


 Hint

Snap to Grid works whether or not the grid is displayed.


 Hint

To make the Y2 axis active, use Series on the Chart Options menu to define a second Y axis.


 Hint

You can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key while you click on the files you want to open.


 Hint

If there are any existing backup files when you open WP Presentations, a dialog box appears, asking if you want to Rename, Delete, or Open existing backup files.  Choose any of these options to continue.


Keyboard and Keystroke Information
Keyboard & Keystroke Information

Use the following keyboard options to help you access features using keystrokes and keyboard layouts.

Choose 	For information about

Default (CUA) Keyboard	returning to or selecting the CUA keyboard

Shortcut Keys	using shortcut keys to access commonly used features

Keyboard Menus 	choosing menu items with the keyboard

Keyboard Dialog Boxes	accessing dialog box options with the keyboard

Keyboard Draw Objects	drawing objects with the keyboard

Keyboard Editor	creating a customized keyboard


Shortcut Keys

Use Shortcut Keys, sometimes called accelerator keys, to access the most commonly used features from the keyboard.  For example, type Ctrl+B to type bold text or F5 to print.

Some shortcut keys are shown on the pull-down menus next to various menu commands.


Keyboard Menus

Use the keyboard to choose commands from menus.

To access menus using the keyboard,

1	Hold down the Alt key and type the mnemonic for the menu you want to open.  For example, type Alt+F to open the File menu, or Alt+E to open the Edit menu.

2	Type the mnemonic for the menu option you want.

3	Type the mnemonic for an option you want to access from a cascading menu.

See Also

Keyboard Dialog Boxes

Keyboard Draw Objects


Keyboard Dialog Boxes

Use the keyboard to choose options in dialog boxes.

To choose options in a dialog box using the keyboard,

1	Press Alt and then type the mnemonic for the option you want.

2	Choose OK or Close, then press Enter.

See Also

Keyboard Draw Objects

Keyboard Menus


Keyboard Draw Objects

Use the keyboard to draw objects.

To draw objects using the keyboard,

1	Press Alt+D to select the drawing tool you want from the Draw menu, then type the mnemonic.

2	Position the pointer where you want the object to begin using the arrow keys.

3	Press the space bar to place the first anchor handle.

4	Hold down the space bar and use the arrow keys to reposition the pointer.

5	Release the space bar to place another anchor handle.

6	Press the space bar again to continue drawing with the arrow keys.

7	Release the space bar to finish objects without anchor handles.

or... Press Enter to stop drawing.

See Also

Keyboard Dialog Boxes

Keyboard Menus


Search Button

Use the Search button to find topics by feature name or keyword.

To search for a particular topic,

1	Choose the Search button from the Help buttons above.

2	Type or select the word or phrase you want to search for.

3	Double-click a term from the list of terms.  (You can also choose Show Topics or press Enter.)

4	Double-click a term from the list of topics.  (You can also select the topic you want to view, then choose Go To.)

See Also

Glossary

How Do I

Index

Menus


Using Help

The following information explains basic features of a Help topic (this screen is a Help topic).

Pop-up definitions are dotted-underlined, green words that you click on to see a "pop-up" window that displays information.  These pop-ups explain the buttons on the top of this Help screen.  Click once to read them, then click again to close them:

Contents

Search

Back

History

Print

Browse

Jump terms are underlined, green words and phrases that move you to another Help topic.  To read the topic about context-sensitive Help, click this jump term:  Context-Sensitive Help, then click the Back button to return to this Help topic.

The light bulb is an icon containing a hint.  Click the light bulb to read the hint.

Text following a Quick Access Pointer icon shows the menus and buttons you choose to access a feature.

Text following a red exclamation point is important information.

Many Help topics contain graphics you can click to display a pop-up.  However, when a graphic appears in front of the title, it is not a pop-up.


Contents button

A Help button you can use to return to the main Contents screen.


Search button

A Help button you can use to search for Help topics by typing in keywords.


Back button

A Help button you can use to return to the last topic you opened.


History button

A Help button you can use to display the last 40 Help topics you opened, with the most recent at the top of the list.  To re-open a topic, double-click it.


Print button

A Help button you can use to print the current Help topic.


pop-up definition

A graphic or dotted-underlined, colored word that you can click to display a definition or explanation.  Pop-up definitions cannot be printed.

To choose a pop-up definition, run the mouse pointer over the dotted-underlined, colored word until the pointer changes to a hand [image], then click.

To close the pop-up definition, click the mouse once anywhere on the screen.


Context-Sensitive Help

Use Shift+F1 or F1 to get Help in a dialog box, menu, or window.  Shift+F1 Help requires a mouse and is more specific than F1.

To use Shift+F1,

1	Press Shift+F1, in a dialog box, menu, or window.

2	Click the item or control you want information about.

To use F1,

1	Press F1 while a menu item is highlighted, or when a dialog box or window is open.

or... Choose the Help button.


 Hint

You can reduce the size and move the Help window to keep it on screen while you follow the steps:

Choose Always on Top from the Help menu above to display the Help window "on top" of WP Presentations, even when it is minimized.

Or, size both Help and WP Presentations so they do not overlap.


 Quick Access Pointer

The hand pointer which indicates where a feature is found.  The Quick Access icon points to the steps you take to access the feature.


jump (def.)
jump term

A graphic or underlined, green word or phrase you can choose to "go to" another Help topic.


About WP Presentations (def.)
About WP Presentations

A Help menu item that displays a dialog box containing the release dates of your software, your license number, and a place to change your license number.

If you need to call WordPerfect's Customer Support, the information in About WP Presentations will be helpful to the operator assisting you.


Browse buttons (def.)
Browse buttons

Buttons which display the previous (<<) or next (>>) topic in a series of grouped or associated topics.  When you reach the first or last topic in the series, the corresponding previous or next button is dimmed.


Slide Links

Slide, Slide Links

Use Slide Links to create an interactive slide show.  You can adapt a slide show for your audience by defining and assigning a key for each slide.  When you press that key, the specified slide appears.

To connect slides in a current slide show,

1	Create or retrieve a slide show.

2	Choose Slide Links from the Slide menu.

3	Specify the number of the slide you want to assign links to using the arrow buttons.

4	Place a letter or number for the key in the Key text box.

5	Choose the slide you want to link from the Go to Slide drop-down list, then choose Add.

6	Repeat steps 3-5 to add other connections.

7	Choose OK.

Choose the following Slide Links option for more information:

Change

See Also

Slide Show

Slide Transition


 Hint

You can set which slide all other keys will go to from the Other Keys Go to drop-down list.


Slide Links Change

Slide, Slide Links

Use Change to edit keys you have linked as connections in your slide show.

To change a current slide definition,

1	Choose Slide Links from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide you want to edit using the arrow buttons.

3	Highlight the link showing in the Key List/Go To list box, then choose Change.

4	Select the new link entry from the Go to Slide drop-down list, then choose Change.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Slide Links

Slide Show


Slide Menu

Use the options on the Slide menu to create slide shows.

Add Slide

Delete Slide

Master Gallery

Template

Speaker Notes

Title

Transition

Sound

Slide Links

Override

Make Run-time

Play Slide Show


Add Slide

Slide, Add Slide

Use Add Slide to create a slide show.

To add a slide,

1	Choose Add Slide from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the number of slides you want to add.

3	Choose the Template you want from the pop-up list.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Delete Slide

Slide Show

Template


 Hint

Create a slide by drawing, adding text, retrieving a graphic, using the bitmap feature or chart feature, or by using the Master Gallery.


 Hint

To see an overview of your slide show, use the Slide Sorter located to the immediate left of the Slider Scroll Bar at the bottom of your screen.


Delete Slide

Slide, Delete Slide

Use Delete Slide to delete a slide from a slide show.

To delete a slide,

1	Use the Slide Scroll Bar to open the slide you want to delete.

2	Choose Delete Slide from the Slide Menu.

3	Choose Yes to delete the selected slide.

See Also

Add Slide


 Hint

Other sequential slides are automatically renumbered.


Make Run-time

Slide, Make Run-time

Use Make Run-time to copy a slide show with necessary program files to a disk so you can run them on computers that do not have WP Presentations installed.

To make a Run-time slide show,

1	Create or retrieve a slide show.

If you created a new slide show, save it before continuing.

2	Choose Make Run-time from the Slide menu.

3	Name the slide show file and specify the location (disk drive) for the file.

4	Choose OK to create the quick file of your slide show.

5	Choose OK to copy the sound drivers if you included sound in your slide show.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Quick File

Play Slide Show

Save As


Show Run-time

Use Show Run-time to show your stand-alone slide show on any computer that has Windows 3.1 or higher installed.

You must have created a Run-time slide show in order to show a Run-time slide show.

To view a Run-time slide show,

1	Choose Run from the Program Manager File menu, and type show.exe after the drive and directory where your slide show file is located (for example, a:\show.exe).

or... Double-click the Run-time icon in Program Manager.

2	Type the Run Show File of the show you want to view in the Filename text box.

or... Choose Other File to select the slide show you want to view from the File Name list box.

3	Choose OK.

4	Stop the slide show at any time by pressing Esc.

See Also

Make Run-time

Play Slide Show

Slide Transition Advance


 Hint

Choose an option from the Drives drop-down list and Directories list box to change drives and directories.


Master Gallery

Slide, Master Gallery

Use Master Gallery to display or import predesigned master template sets of page colors, chart styles, and page arrangements.

To display or import a master and its templates,

1	Choose Master Gallery from the Slide menu.

2	Select the Master Template you want.

3	Choose Templates.

4	Choose Retrieve to apply a pre-designed master to your current slide show, or choose Import to retrieve a master you previously created.

Choose the following Gallery option for more information:

Import

See Also

Gallery Options

Insert File

Master Templates

Slide Template

Template Pop-up List


 Hint

Choose Masters to return to the Master Template list.


 Hint

The set of templates you selected is now available on the Template Pop-up List on the bottom left of your screen.


Master Gallery Import

Slide, Master Gallery

Edit, Master Templates, Master Gallery

Use Import to retrieve and use a slide show master you previously created.

To import a master template,

1	Choose Master Gallery from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Import.

3	Type the filename including the full pathname in the Filename text box.

or... Select the file you want from the Files list box.

4	Choose Import.

See Also

Master Gallery

Master Templates

Slide Template

Template Pop-up List Button


 Hint

The set of templates you selected is now available on the Template Pop-up List Button on the bottom left of your screen.


Gallery Options

Use Gallery Options to specify how many columns of images the galleries display and to create Quick Files.

To set gallery options,

1	Open a gallery.

2	Choose Options.

3	Specify the Number of Columns you want the gallery to display.

4	Select Create Quick Files to speed up gallery display.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Chart Gallery

Create Quick File

Figure Gallery

Master Gallery


Speaker Notes

Slide, Speaker Notes

Use Speaker Notes to prepare notes for your slide show.  Notes can be placed on the same page as thumbnail sketches of each slide and printed to give an overview of your slide show.

To create speaker notes,

1	Choose Speaker Notes from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the number of the slide you want using the arrow buttons.

3	Type a note for the slide.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have typed all the notes you want.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Add Slide

Print

Slide Show


Slide Transition

Slide, Transition

Use Slide Transition to choose transitions between each slide in your slide show.

To choose transitions,

1	Choose Transition from the Slide Menu.

2	Specify the slide number you want using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose the Type of transition you want from the pop-up list.

4	Choose a Size or Direction from the pop-up lists.

5	Select Cascade Bullets for bulleted items.

6	Select Transition Bullets Only for bulleted items to have selected transition options.

7	Select Overlay if you want the current slide to be imposed on the previous slide.

8	Select Manual from the Advance group box to advance the slides yourself.

or... Select Timed, then specify the Seconds to Delay.

9	Select Skip Current Slide to leave a slide out.

10	Choose Preview to see the result of the transition you chose.

11	Repeat steps 2-6 to choose other transitions.

12	Choose Links to set connections.

13	Choose Sound to set up the soundtrack.

14	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Slide Transition options for more information:

Advance

Preview

Links

Sound

See Also

Play Slide Show

Slide Override


Slide Transition Advance

Slide, Transition, Advance

Use Advance to determine the way your slides move forward.  You can advance slides manually or time them to delay for a specified number of seconds.

To use Advance,

1	Choose Transition from the Slide Menu.

2	Specify the slide number you want using the arrow buttons.

3	Select Manual to advance slides yourself.

or... Select Timed, then specify the Seconds to Delay.

4	Select Skip Current Slide to leave a slide out.

5	Repeat steps 2-4 for other slides.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Preview Transitions

Slide Links


Preview Transitions

Slide, Preview

Use Preview to look at transitions you have chosen for your slide show.  The Preview Transition box is avaliable on the Slide Transition and Slide Override dialog boxes.

To preview transitions,

1	Choose Transition from the Slide Menu.

2	Specify the slide number you want using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose Preview to see the transition take place.

4	Repeat steps 2-3 to view other slide transitions.

See Also

Slide Links

Slide Override

Slide Transition

Slide Transition Advance


Slide Override

Slide, Override

Use Override to apply one transition and delay combination to all slides in the current slide show.  You must deselect Override Transition to return to the original transitions.

To override transitions and delays,

1	Retrieve an existing slide show that contains transitions or delays you want to override.

2	Choose Override from the Slide menu, then select Override Transition.

3	Select a transition from the Type pop-up list.

4	Choose a Size or Direction from the pop-up lists.

5	Select Cascade Bullets for bulleted items.

6	Select Transition Bullets Only for bulleted items to have selected transition options.

7	Select Manual from the Advance group box to advance the slides yourself.

or... Select Timed, then specify the Seconds to Delay.

8	Choose Preview to see the result of the transition you chose.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Preview Transitions

Slide Transition

Slide Transition: Advance


Play Slide Show

Slide, Play Slide Show

Use Play Slide Show to play the slide show you create.

To play a slide show,

1	Create or retrieve a slide show.

2	Choose Play Slide Show from the Slide menu.

3	Specify where you want to begin viewing your slide show using the arrow buttons.

or... Specify the starting slide in the Starting Slide text box.

4	Choose Play to run your slide show.

Choose the following Play Slide Show options for more information:

Create Quick File

Highlighter

See Also

Make Run-Time

Slide Override

Slide Show

Slide Transition


Create Quick File

Slide, Play Slide Show

Use Create Quick File to save an entire slide show as bitmap images.

To create a Quick File,

1	Choose Play Slide Show from the Slide menu.

2	Choose Create Quick File.

3	Select Use Quick File and choose Play to play the Quick File slide show.

See Also

Make Run-time

Play Slide Show

Slide Show

Slide Transition


Highlighter

Slide, Play Slide Show, Highlighter

Use Highlighter to underline a portion of a slide during a slide show.

To highlight slides,

1	Choose Play Slide Show from the Slide menu.

2	Select a highlighter color from the color palette.

3	Specify a Line Width.

or... Click the line width icon to select a line width.

4	Choose Play.

See Also

Play Slide Show

Slide Show

Slide Transition


Slide Sound

Slide, Sound

Use Sound to add sound to a slide show.  You can add MIDI, digital audio, or CD audio sound files to one or more slides.  You can also use sound playback options.

You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play sound.  See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

To add sound to a slide show,

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide you want to add sound to using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose Digital Audio, MIDI, or CD Audio.

4	Set the Volume controls for Digital Audio, MIDI, and CD Audio.

5	Choose Options for each type of sound file.

6	Choose Record for new Digital Audio sound files.

7	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

Choose from the following Sound options for more information:

Digital Audio

MIDI

CD Audio

Record

Options

See Also

Play Slide Show

Slide Links

Slide Transition

Sound Clips


MIDI

Slide, Sound, MIDI

Use MIDI to add MIDI sound clips to a slide show.  Each MIDI sound clip is stored as a file, usually with a .MID extension.

You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play back sound.  Please see your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

To add a MIDI sound clip to an active presentation,

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu.

2	Type the filename of the MIDI sound clip in the MIDI text box.

3	Choose Options, select the options you want to include, then choose OK.

4	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

5	To adjust the playback volume, move the Volume button.

6	Repeat steps 2-5 to hear another MIDI sound clip.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

CD Audio

Digital Audio

Select Directory

Sound Clips

Sound Options


Digital Audio

Slide, Sound, Digital Audio

Use Digital Audio to add digital sound clips to a slide show.  Each digital audio sound clip is stored as a file, usually with a .WAV extension.  You can also record your own digital audio clips and attach them to a slide show.

You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play back sound.  See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

To add a digital audio sound clip to a slide show,

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu.

2	Type the filename of the digital audio sound clip in the Digital Audio text box.

3	Choose Options, select the options you want to include, then choose OK.

4	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

5	To adjust the playback volume, move the Volume button.

6	Repeat steps 2-5 to hear another Digital Audio sound clip.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

CD Audio

MIDI

Record Digital Sound

Select Directory

Sound Clips

Sound Options


Record Digital Sound

Slide, Sound, Digital Audio, Record

Use Record Digital Sound to record digital audio sound clips to accompany your slide show.

You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play back sound.  See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

To record a digital audio sound clip,

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu.

2	Type the filename of the digital audio sound clip you want to record in the Digital Audio text box.

3	Choose Record.

4	Choose Record (the button with the microphone on it), then speak into the computer's microphone.

5	Use the Play and Stop buttons or the scrol bar to insert sound in a particular place in a file.

6	Choose Stop.

7	Choose Save As from the File menu to save a new file.  Specify the filename, then choose OK.

or ...  Choose Save from the File menu to replace an existing file.

8	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

9	To adjust the playback volume, move the Volume button.

10	Choose OK.

See Also

Digital Audio

Select Directory

Sound Clips


CD-Audio

Slide, Sound, CD Audio

Use CD-Audio to add CD sound clips to a slide show.

You must have a CD player and sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards connected to your computer to use this feature.  See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

To add a CD audio sound clip to a slide show,

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu.

2	Click the CD icon.

3	Specify the Track, Minutes, Seconds, and Frame in the Start Location and End Location group boxes.

4	Type a name for the sound clip, then choose OK.

5	Choose Options to set CD Audio options.

6	Choose Play to hear the current sound clip, then choose Stop when you are finished.

7	To adjust the playback volume, move the Volume button to the desired setting.

8	Repeat steps 3 -7 to select a different CD audio sound clip.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Digital Audio

MIDI

Sound Options


Sound Options

Slide, Sound, Sound Options

Use Sound Options for MIDI, digital audio, or CD audio sound files.

You must have sound hardware compatible with Windows 3.1 MPC standards installed in your computer to record or play back sound.  See your computer manual for information on sound hardware.

To add sound to a slide show,

1	Choose Sound from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide you want to add sound to using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose Digital Audio, MIDI, or CD Audio.

4	Choose Options.

5	Select the options you want in the Digital Audio, MIDI, or CD Audio group box.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Digital Audio

MIDI

CD-Audio


Slide Title

Slide, Title

Use Title to give each slide in your slide show a title.

To use Title,

1	Choose Title from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the number of the slide you want using the arrow buttons.

3	Type a title for the slide.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have given each slide a title.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Speaker Notes


Slide Template

Slide, Template

Use Slide Template to use pre-designed backgrounds, colors, and layouts for one or more slides in your slide show.

To choose slide templates,

1	Choose Template from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide number you want the template to apply to using the arrow buttons.

3	Select the template you want from the Template list box.

4	Choose Preview to view the template you have highlighted.

5	Select Display Page Colors if you want the selected templates to determine the page color.

6	Select which slides you want the template to apply to.

7	Choose Detach to edit the template assigned to the slide.

8	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Slide Template options for more information:

Apply To

Display Page Colors

Detach

See Also

Master Gallery

Preview Template

Templates


 Hint

If you select Slide Range, type the range of slides you want the template to apply to by specifying the Start and End slide numbers.


Slide Template Apply To

Slide, Template, Apply To

Use Apply To to specify which slides you want to conform to a template.

To apply a chosen template to specific slides,

1	Choose Template from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the first slide number you want the template to apply to using the arrow buttons.

3	Select the template you want from the Template list box.

4	Specify which slides you want the template to apply to.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Preview Template

Slide Template

Slide Template Display Page Color

Templates


 Hint

If you want the template to apply only to some of the slides, select Slide Range, then specify the range of slides you want the template to apply to by specifying the Start and End slide numbers (for example, 3-7 to include slides 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7).


Slide Template Display Page Color

Slide, Template, Display Page Color

Use Display Page Color to apply the page colors of the template to your slides.

To use template page colors in your slides,

1	Choose Template from the Slide menu.

2	Specify the slide number you want the template to apply to using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose the template you want from the Template list box.

4	Select Display Page Color.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Preview Template

Slide Template

Slide Template Apply To

Templates


Slide Template Detach

Slide, Template, Detach

Use Detach to remove the link between a template and its master and assign it to the current slide as a permanent part of the slide.  When you detach a template, you can edit it as you would any other part of the slide.

In order to detach a template, you must first assign a template to a slide.

To remove a selected template for editing,

1	Choose Template from the Slide menu.

2	Select a slide with a template attached using the arrow buttons.

3	Choose Detach to break the link between the template master and the current slide.

4	Choose Yes.

See Also

Arrange Menu

Master Gallery

Preview Template

Slide Template


Preview Template

Slide, Template, Preview

Use Preview to display the templates for your slide show.

To preview templates,

1	Choose Template from the Slide menu, then select a template.

2	Choose Preview to see the template.

3	Choose Close from the Control menu.

See Also

Slide Template

Slide Template Apply To

Slide Template Display Page Color


Template Menu

Edit, Templates, Template Menu

Use the options on the Template menu to add, delete, or modify templates in the Template Editor.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Template Editor:

Add Template

Delete Template

Master Gallery

Link

Name


Add Template

Edit, Templates, Template, Add Template

Use Add Template to create and add a new template to the current master.

To create a template,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Template Editor:

2	From the Template Editor, choose Add Template from the Template menu.

3	Type a name for the new template in the Name text box, then choose OK.

or... Choose OK to use the name WP Presentations recommends.

4	Create your template by adding page colors, backgrounds, text, drawn objects, bitmaps, or charts.

5	Choose Save As to save the Master Template file with a .mst extension.

6	Click Return to Slide Show [image] to close the Template Editor and return to your slide show.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the Edit menu).

See Also

Delete Template

Edit a Template

Link Templates

Master Gallery

Name Template

Templates


 Hint

The new template is added to the master and can be selected and applied like other templates in the Template Pop-up List.


Delete Template

Edit, Templates, Template, Delete Template

Use Delete Template to remove a template from a master.

To delete a template,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Template Editor:

2	From the Template Editor, choose [image], then choose the template you want to delete.

3	Choose Delete Template from the Template menu.

4	Choose Yes.

5	Choose Save As to save the Master Template file with a .mst extension.

6	Click Return to Slide Show [image] to close the Template Editor and return to your slide show.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the Edit menu).

See Also

Add Template

Edit a Template

Link Templates

Master Gallery

Name Template

Templates


Link Template

Edit, Templates, Template, Link

Use Link to apply the attributes of a template to one or more templates in a master.

To link templates,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Template Editor:

2	From the Template Editor, choose Link from the Template menu.

3	Select the template you want to link from the Template pop-up list, and select the template you want to link it to from the Link To list box.

4	Choose Range to select the templates to which you want to apply your changes, then choose OK.

5	Choose OK.

6	Choose Save As to save the Master Template file with an .mst extension.

7	Click Return to Slide Show [image] to close the Template Editor and return to your slide show.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the Edit menu).

See Also

Add Template

Delete Template

Master Gallery

Name Template

Templates


 Hint

All Templates links the selected template to all templates in the master.  Current Template links only the current template.  Template Range links a selected range of templates, beginning with the number in the Start text box and ending with the number in the End text box.


Name Template

Edit, Templates, Template, Name Template

Use Name to assign a new name to an existing template.

To name a template,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Template Editor:

2	From the Template Editor, choose Name from the Template menu.

3	Specify the template you want to rename using the arrow buttons.

4	Type the a name for the template in the text box and choose OK.

5	Choose Save As and save the Master Template file with an .mst extension.

6	Click Return to Slide Show [image] to close the Template Editor and return to your slide show.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the Edit menu).

See Also

Add Template

Delete Template

Link Templates

Master Gallery

Templates


 Hint

The template has a new name and can be selected and applied like other templates in the Template Pop-up List.


Text Menu

Draw, Text

Draw, Bitmap, Text

Draw, Chart, Text

Use the options on the Text menu to set fonts, appearance, and layout for the appearance and format of your text in the Text Editor.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

You can create text for a drawing, slide show, or bitmap image.

Font

Normal

Bold

Italic

Underline

Date

Outline

Search/Replace

Layout

Advance

Justification

Speller

WP Characters


Text Area

Draw, Text

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Text

Use a Text Area to create or edit text.

To create a text area,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Text from the Draw menu.)

2	Drag to create an area for the text.

3	Type your text, or retrieve text from a file or from the Clipboard.

4	To close the text area, click outside it or select another tool.

or... Press the right mouse button and choose Exit Text Editor from the Pop-up Menu.

See Also

Font

Retrieve Text

Text Line

Text Menu


 Hint

To constrain the text area to a square, hold down Shift as you drag.  To drag from the center, hold down Alt as you drag.


Text Line

Draw, Text

Draw, Bitmap, Paint, Text

Use a Text Line to create or edit one line of text.

To create a text line,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.  (You can also choose Text from the Draw menu.)

2	Click the drawing window to start the text line.

3	Type text, or retrieve text from a file or the Clipboard.

4	To close the text line, click once or select another tool.

or... Press the right mouse button and choose Exit Text Editor from the Pop-up Menu.

See Also

Font

Retrieve Text

Text Area

Text Menu


 Hint

You can only type or retrieve one line of text when using a text line; text will not wrap to another line.


Retrieve Text

File, Insert File

Edit, Paste

Use Insert File to retrieve a text file into a text line or text area.

To retrieve a text file,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Insert File from the File menu.

3	Type the filename of the text file you want to retrieve.

4	Choose Retrieve.

To retrieve text from the Clipboard,

1	Define a text area or text line.

2	Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

See Also

Open

Text Area

Text Line


Normal Text

Text, Normal

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Normal

Draw, Chart, Text, Normal

Use Normal to reset text to normal (without appearance attributes).

To turn off all text attributes for new text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Normal from the Text menu.

3	Type the new text.

To reset existing text to normal,

1	Select the text that should not have appearance attributes.

or... Place the insertion point before the text.

2	Choose Normal from the Text menu.

See Also

Bold

Font

Italic

Text Area

Text Line

Underline


Bold

Text, Bold

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Bold

Draw, Chart, Text, Bold

Use Bold to make text appear bold.

To create bold text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Bold from the Text menu.

3	Type the text.

4	Choose Bold again to turn off the Bold attribute.

To bold existing text,

1	Select the text to be bolded.

2	Choose Bold from the Text menu.

See Also

Font

Italic

Normal Text

Text Area

Text Line

Underline


Italic

Text, Italic

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Italic

Draw, Chart, Text, Italic

Use Italic to make text appear italicized.

To create italic text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Italic from the Text menu.

3	Type the text.

4	Choose Italic again to turn off the Italic attribute.

To italicize existing text,

1	Select the text to be italicized.

2	Choose Italic from the Text menu.

See Also

Bold

Font

Normal Text

Text Area

Text Line

Underline


Underline

Text, Underline

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Underline

Draw, Chart, Text, Underline

Use Underline to underline text.

To create underlined text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Underline from the Text menu.

3	Type the text.

4	Choose Underline again to turn off the underline attribute.

To underline existing text,

1	Select the text to be underlined.

2	Choose Underline from the Text menu.

See Also

Bold

Font

Italic

Normal Text

Text Area

Text Line


Date

Text, Date

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Date

Draw, Chart, Text, Date

Use Date to place date information in text, according to the current date and time information stored in your computer.

To place date information in your text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Date from the Text menu, then choose Text or Code.

See Also

Date Code

Date Text

Date Format

Preferences


 Hint

You can insert the date as text, or as a code that changes to the current date and time each time the document is opened.  You can also change the display format of the date and time.


Date Text

Text, Date, Date Text

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Date, Text

Draw, Chart, Text, Date, Text

Use Date Text to insert the current date into a text area.  The date will not change or update automatically.  Once the date is inserted, you can edit it and apply attributes to it.

To insert the current date/time as text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, move the insertion point to the place where you want the date inserted.

3	Choose Date from the Text menu, then choose Text.

See Also

Date Code

Date Format

Preferences

Text Area


Date Code

Text, Date, Date Code

Use Date Code to insert the current date and time into a text area.  This ensures that the current date and time is displayed each time your text is retrieved, viewed or printed.

To insert the current date and time as a code in your document,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, move the insertion point to the place where you want the date inserted.

3	Choose Date from the Text menu, then choose Date Code.

See Also

Date Text

Date Format

Preferences


Date Format

Text, Date, Format

Draw, Chart, Text, Date, Format

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Date, Format

Use Date Format to change the appearance of date text inserted with the Date Text or Date Code options.  Date Format applies to the current slide only.

To change the date format in the current text area,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Date from the Text menu, then choose Format.

3	Choose from the Date Codes and Time Codes pop-up lists to format the date.

or... Choose a predefined date format from the Formats list box.

or... Type a custom text date in the Edit Format text box.  You must enter codes using the Date Codes and Time codes pop-up lists.

4	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Date Format options for more information:

Edit Format

Formats

See Also

Date Code

Date Text

Preferences


Formats

Text, Date, Format, Formats

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Date, Format, Formats

Draw, Chart, Text, Date, Format, Formats

Use Formats to select pre-formatted dates for the current document.

To choose a predefined date for the current document,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Date from the Text menu, then choose Format.

3	Select a date format from the Formats list box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Date Format

Edit Format

Preferences


Edit Format

Text, Date, Format, Edit Format

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Date, Format, Edit Format

Draw, Chart, Text, Date, Format, Edit Format

Use Edit Format to create a custom date format for the current document.  Edit Format lets you combine text and punctuation with codes from the Date Codes and Time Codes pop-up lists.

To edit a custom date format for the current document,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Date from the Text menu, then choose Format.

3	Choose the date and time elements that you want from the Date Codes and Time Codes pop-up lists.  You can delete the unwanted codes.

or... Type a date format in the Edit Format text box.  You can type text (except for numbers, the dollar sign ($), or the percent sign (%)), but you cannot type date or time codes.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Date Code

Date Text

Formats

Preferences


 Hint

If you want to change the Date Format for all new documents, choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Date Format.  Make your changes, choose OK, then choose Yes in the Update Page Settings dialog box.  Choose Close.


Advance

Text, Advance

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Advance

Draw, Chart, Text, Advance

Use Advance to adjust the horizontal position of text within a text area or text line.

To move your text horizontally,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Advance from the Text menu.

3	Select Left or Right, then type the distance in the Distance text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Text Area

Text Line

Units of Measure


 Hint

The distance you specify is measured relative to the insertion point position.  If you do not specify a unit of measure, the default unit of measure is used.


Justification

Text, Justification

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Justification

Draw, Chart, Text, Justification

Use Justification to position your text in relation to the sides of a text line or text area.  Justification settings affect all text until you change the justification.

To choose justification for new text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Justification from the Text menu, then choose Left, Right, or Center.

3	Type the text.

To justify existing text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, select the text you want to justify.

or... Move the insertion point to the place where you want to begin justification.

3	Choose Justification from the Text menu, then choose Left, Right, or Center.

See Also

Text Layout


Font

Text, Font

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Font

Draw, Chart, Text, Font

Use Font to determine the general style of text in your slides.  You can choose one or more fonts in a text area or text line.

To choose a font while typing or editing text,

1	Choose Font from the Text menu.

2	Select a font from the Font list box.

3	Select a font size from the Point Size list box.

4	Select font options in the Appearance group box.

5	Choose Attributes to set the color and pattern, then choose OK.

6	Choose OK.

To apply font changes to existing text,

1	Select the text you want to change.

or... Place the insertion point before the text that you want to change.

2	Choose Font from the Text menu.

3	Follow steps 2-6 above.

See Also

Default Font

Text Area

Text Attributes

Text Line

Text Menu


Layout

Text, Layout

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Layout

Draw, Chart, Text, Layout

Use the options on the Layout menu to determine the format of text in the Text Editor.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

Center

Flush Right

Indent

Back Tab


Center Text

Text, Layout, Center

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Layout, Center

Draw, Chart, Text, Layout, Center

Use Center to center text between the left and right edges of a text area or text line.  You must define a text area or a text line before you can use this feature.

To create centered text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Layout from the Text menu, then choose Center.

3	Type the text.

4	Press Enter to end the centered line and begin a new line.

To center existing text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, select the text you want to center.

or... Move the insertion point to the beginning of the text.

3	Choose Layout from the Text menu, then choose Center.

See Also

Flush Right

Justification

Text Area

Text Line


 Hint

Center affects only the current text line.


Flush Right

Text, Layout, Flush Right

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Layout, Flush Right

Draw, Chart, Text, Layout, Flush Right

Use Flush Right to align text at the right edge of a text area.  You can apply flush right to all or part of a line.

To create flush right text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Layout from the Text menu, then choose Flush Right.

3	Type the text.

4	Press Enter to end the flush right alignment and begin a new line.

To use flush right on existing text,

1	Select the text you want to align at the  right edge.

or... Move the insertion point to the beginning of the text.

2	Choose Layout from the Text menu, then choose Flush Right.

See Also

Center Text

Justification

Text Window


 Hint

Flush Right affects only the current text line.


Indent

Text, Layout, Indent

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Layout, Indent

Draw, Chart, Text, Layout, Indent

Use Indent to indent the left margin of a text paragraph by five spacesin a text area or text line.

To create indented text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Layout from the Text menu, then choose Indent.

3	Type the text.

4	Press Enter to end the paragraph.

To indent existing text,

1	Move the insertion point to the beginning of the line of text.

2	Choose Layout from the Text menu, and then choose Indent.

See Also

Back Tab

Text Window


 Hint

Indent affects only the current paragraph.


Back Tab

Text, Layout, Back Tab

Use Back Tab to move the insertion point one tab stop to the left in a text area or text line.  When the Outline feature is active, Back Tab returns you to a previous numbering level on the current line.

To release margins in a text area or text line,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, place the insertion point where you want to move the margin one tab stop.

3	Choose Layout from the Text menu, then choose Back Tab.

To use Back Tab in an outline,

1	Choose Layout from the Text menu, then choose Back Tab.

2	Repeat the above step as often as necessary.

See Also

Outline

Text Window


Text Outline

Text, Outline

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Outline

Use Outline to create a text outline with labeled headings in the Text Editor.  Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

When you add or delete outline entries, the entire outline is automatically renumbered to reflect the changes you make.

Outline On

Outline Off

Paragraph Number

Define


Text Outline On or Outline Off

Text, Outline, Outline On or Outline Off

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Outline, Outline On or Outline Off

Use Outline On in a text area to create a text outline with numbered headings.  Use Outline Off at the end of the outline so that additional text is not in outline form.

To create a text outline (Outline On),

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Outline from the Text menu, then choose Outline On.

3	Press Enter to insert the paragraph number for a heading in the outline.

4	Type the text for the heading.

5	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional heading at the same level.

6	To create a subheading level, press Enter, then press Tab.

7	To return to a previous subheading level, press Enter and then press Shift+Tab.

8	Repeat steps 2 through 6 as necessary to finish the outline.

To turn off an outline (Outline Off),

1	Choose Outline from the Text menu, then choose Outline Off.

See Also

Define Paragraph Numbering

Text Area


 Hint

Use Indent to move the text to the right and leave the paragraph number in place.  Using Tab changes the level.


 Hint

The indented subheading uses the next paragraph numbering system (such as A., 1., a., (1), and so on).


Paragraph Number

Text, Outline, Paragraph Number

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Outline, Paragraph Number

Use Paragraph Number in a text area to insert paragraph numbers in text that is not in Outline form.  When you insert or delete a numbered paragraph, all other numbered paragraphs are automatically renumbered.

To insert a paragraph number,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Outline from the Text menu, then choose Paragraph Number.

See Also

Define Paragraph Numbering

Text Outline

Text Area


Define Paragraph Numbering

Text, Outline, Define

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Outline, Define

Use Define Paragraph Numbering in a text area to create custom Outline paragraph numbers.

To define paragraph numbering,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, position the insertion point where you want the changes.

3	Choose Outline from the Text menu, then choose Define.

4	Choose a predefined numbering format from the Predefined Formats pop-up list.

5	Highlight the Level of outline you want to assign in the Level/Style list box.

6	Choose the style you want from the Style icon.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Paragraph Number

Text Outline

Text Area


 Hint

If you select a level other than 1, select the Attach Previous Level check box to make the previous level display with the selected level.


Search and Replace

Text, Search/Replace

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Search and Replace

Draw, Chart, Text, Search and Replace

Use Search and Replace to find specific words or phrases in a text area or text line, and replace them with other words or phrases.  Search and Replace only works when you are creating or editing a text area or text line.

To use Search and Replace,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Search/Replace from the Text menu.

3	Type the word or phrase you want to search for in the Search For text box,.

4	Type the replacement word or phrase in the Replace With text box.

5	Choose the direction the program will search from the Direction pop-up list.

6	Choose Replace to replace the word or phrase currently selected.

or... Choose Replace All to replace the word or phrase changed every time it appears.

or... Choose Search Next, then Replace to replace the word or phrase the next time it appears.

7	Choose Close when the search is completed.

See Also

Speller


 Hint

Forward will search from the cursor to the end of the document; Backward will search from the cursor to the beginning of the document.


Speller

Text, Speller

Draw, Bitmap, Text, Speller

Draw, Chart, Text, Speller

Use Speller to check for misspelled words, and to search for double words and irregular capitalization.

To spell-check a document,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, open or create the document you want to check.

3	Choose Speller from the Text menu.

4	Choose an option from the Check menu.

or... Type the word you want checked.

5	Choose Start.

6	When the spell-check is done, choose Yes.

See Also

Search and Replace


WordPerfect Characters

Text, WordPerfect Characters

Draw, Bitmap, Text, WordPerfect Characters

Draw, Chart, Text, WordPerfect Characters

Use WordPerfect Characters to insert special characters in a text area or text line.

To insert WordPerfect characters,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, place the insertion point where you want the character to appear in the text.

3	Choose WP Characters from the Text menu.

4	Select a character set from the Set pop-up list.

5	Select a character from the characters list box.

6	Choose Insert.

or... Choose Insert and Close to close the dialog box.

7	Choose Close when you have finished.

See Also

Text Area

WordPerfect Character Number


WordPerfect Character Number

Text, WordPerfect Characters, Character Number

Draw, Bitmap, Text, WordPerfect Characters, Character Number

Draw, Chart, Text, WordPerfect Characters, Character Number

Use the Number text box on the WordPerfect Characters dialog box to insert a special character into a text area or text line if you already know a character's assigned number combination (such as 4,19 for the ¢ symbol)

To select a special character using the Number box,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, place the insertion point where you want the character to appear in the text.

3	Choose WP Characters from the Text menu.

4	Type the number combination (such as 4,19 for the ¢ symbol) in the Number box.

5	Choose Insert.

or... Choose Insert and Close to close the dialog box.

6	When you have finished, choose Close.

See Also

Text Area

WordPerfect Characters


 Hint

The number preceding the comma refers to the character set where the character is stored.  The number after the comma is the character's assigned number in that set.  If you select an invalid character set or character, you will receive an error message.


Bullets

Text, WP Characters

Use the WP Characters feature to place bullets and other characters and symbols into your document.

You must be in text mode to use this feature.  For instructions on defining bullets for a bullet chart, use the Bullet Chart Define Bullet feature.

To place a bullet into your document,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose WP Characters from the Text menu.

3	Choose a character set from the Set pop-up list, then click a symbol in the Characters box to use for a bullet.

or... If you know the number of the WP character, type the number in the Number text box.

4	Choose Insert.

or... Choose Insert and Close to close the dialog box.

To place a bullet into existing text,

1	Place the pointer on the desired text, press the right mouse button, then choose Edit Text from the Pop-up Menu.

or... Select the desired text, then choose Edit Text from the Edit menu.

2	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the bullet.

3	Repeat steps 3 and 4 above.

4	Choose Insert and Close, then continue typing the new text.

or... Choose Insert and select another character, then choose Close.

See Also

Pop-up Menu

WP Characters


Button Bar

View, Button Bar

Draw, Bitmap, View, Button Bar

Draw, Chart, View, Button Bar

Use the Button Bar to access commands you use often.

To display or hide the current Button Bar,

1	Choose Button Bar from the View menu.

See Also

Button Bar Edit

Button Bar New

Button Bar Options

Button Bar Save As

Button Bar Select

Button Bar Setup


Button Bar New

View, Button Bar Setup, New

Draw, Bitmap, View, Button Bar Setup, New

Draw, Chart, View, Setup, New

Use New to create your own Button Bar.

To create a Button Bar,

1	Choose Button Bar Setup from the View menu, then choose New.

2	Select menu items add buttons.

or... Drag buttons from the Button Bar to delete them.

or... Drag buttons to new positions on the Button Bar to move them.

3	Choose OK, then specify a directory and filename for the Button Bar.

4	Choose Save.

See Also

Button Bar

Button Bar Edit

Button Bar Options

Button Bar Save As

Button Bar Select


 Hint

WP Presentations adds a .PRB extension to the filename unless you type your own extension.


Button Bar Edit

View, Button Bar Setup, Edit

Draw, Bitmap, View, Button Bar Setup, Edit

Draw, Chart, View, Setup, Edit

Use Edit to edit any Button Bar created in WP Presentations.

To edit a Button Bar,

1	Select the Button Bar you want to edit.

2	Choose Button Bar Setup from the View menu, then choose Edit.

3	Select menu items add buttons.

or... Drag buttons from the Button Bar to delete them.

or... Drag buttons to new positions on the Button Bar to move them.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Button Bar

Button Bar New

Button Bar Options

Button Bar Save As


Button Bar Select

View, Button Bar Setup, Select

Draw, Bitmap, View, Button Bar Setup, Select

Draw, Chart, View, Setup, Select

Use Select to open a Button Bar.

To select a Button Bar,

1	Choose Button Bar Setup from the View menu, then choose Select.

2	Specify the filename of the Button Bar you want.

or... Highlight the Button Bar file from the Files list box.

3	Choose Select.

See Also

Button Bar

Button Bar Edit

Button Bar New

Button Bar Save As

File Options


Button Bar Options

View, Button Bar Setup, Options

Draw, Bitmap, View, Button Bar Setup, Options

Draw, Chart, View, Setup, Options

Use Options to change the position and appearance of Button Bars.

To change Button Bar options,

1	Choose Button Bar Setup from the View menu, then choose Options.

2	Select a window position for your Button Bars.

3	Select a style for your Button Bars.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Button Bar

Button Bar Edit

Button Bar New


 Hint

Your Button Bars can be positioned on the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of your screen.

Your Button Bars can appear with Text Only, Picture Only, or Picture and Text.


Button Bar Setup

View, Button Bar Setup

Draw, Bitmap, View, Button Bar Setup

Draw, Chart, View, Setup

Use Setup to create and modify Button Bars.

Edit

Options

New

Select

Save As


Button Bar Save As

View, Button Bar Setup, Save As

Draw, Bitmap, View, Button Bar Setup, Save As

Draw, Chart, View, Setup, New

Use Save As to save the current Button Bar with a different name.

To rename the current Button Bar,

1	Choose Button Bar Setup from the View menu, then choose Save As.

2	Specify the directory and filename in the Save As text box.

3	Choose Save.

See Also

Button Bar

Button Bar Edit

Button Bar New

Button Bar Select


 Hint

Unless you specify a directory, the file is saved in the current directory.

WP Presentations adds a .PRB extension to the filename, unless you type your own extension.


Crosshair

View, Crosshair

Use the Crosshair Pointer to create, align, and size objects with precision.  A crosshair replaces the mouse pointer and appears as a plus sign that extends the length and width of the drawing window.  The crosshair is especially useful when the Ruler is displayed.

To display or hide the crosshair,

1	Choose Crosshair from the View menu.

See Also

Preferences Display

Ruler


 Hint

If you want to use Crosshair all new documents, choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display.  Make your changes and choose OK, then choose Close.


Draft Mode

View, Draft Mode

Use Draft Mode to display only the outline of the drawn objects and not the fill colors, fill patterns, or other attributes.

To turn Draft Mode on or off in the current document,

1	Choose Draft Mode from the View menu.


 Hint

If you want to use Draft Mode in all new documents, choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display.  Make your changes and choose OK, then choose Yes in the Update Page Settings dialog box.  Choose Close.


View Menu

Use the options on the View menu to change what you see in the WP Presentations window.

Ruler

Grid

Snap to Grid

Grid/Snap Options

Draft Mode

Crosshair

Position Display

Reveal Codes

Palettes

Slide Show

Button Bar

Button Bar Setup

Zoom


Position Display

View, Position Display

Use Position Display to turn the position display for the current document on or off.  The position display appears at the bottom right of the screen.

To activate or remove the pointer position display,

1	Choose Position Display from the View menu.

See Also

Display Pointer Position


Palettes

View, Palettes

Use Palettes to display sticky palettes on the screen where you can choose line styles, fill patterns, and colors.

To display palettes,

1	Choose Palettes from the View menu.

2	Select any of the sticky palettes you want to display.

3	Choose OK.

To close palettes,

1	Click the Control-menu box in the upper left corner of the sticky palette, then choose Close from the Control-menu.

or... Choose Palettes from the View menu, deselect the palettes you want to close, then choose OK.

See Also

Bitmap Tool Palette

Chart Tool Palette

Fill Attributes

Tool Palette


 Hint

The palette(s) you chose appear to the right of the drawing window.  You can move a palette anywhere on the screen by dragging the small bar at the top of the palette.


Slide Show

View, Slide Show

Use Slide Show to view your slides in various ways.

Slide Editor

Outliner

List

Slide Sorter


Slide Show Slide Editor

View, Slide Show, Slide Editor

Use Slide Editor to view individual slides in your slide show.

To view individual slides,

1	Click [image] at the bottom of the screen.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the View menu, then choose Slide Editor.)

See Also

Slide Show

Slide Show List

Slide Show Outliner

Slide Sorter


Slide Show Outliner

View, Slide Show, Outliner

Use the Outliner to create or view a slide show in outline form.

To create a Slide Show outline,

1	Click [image] at the bottom of the screen.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the View menu, then choose Outliner.)  The slide icon represents the first slide.

2	Choose Master Gallery from the Slide menu, select the master you want, then choose Retrieve.

3	Click [image] at the bottom of the screen, then choose the template you want.  (You can also choose Template from the Slide menu, then choose the desired template.)

4	Type a title for the first slide, then press Enter.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have created all the slides in the slide show.

6	Click [image] at the bottom of the screen to create or edit a slide once the outline is complete.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the View menu, then choose Slide Editor.)

See Also

Master Templates

Slide Show

Slide Show List

Slide Show Slide Editor

Slide Sorter Button


 Hint

You can skip step 3 if you want the same template for all your slides.


Slide Show List

View, Slide Show, List

Use List to display the number, title, transition, and advance option (such as delays) for each slide in the current slide show.

To open the List,

1	Click [image] at the bottom of the screen.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the View menu, then choose List.)

To change the order of slides in the list,

1	Click the right mouse button on a slide number.

2	Specify which slide number you want to move in the Move slide number text box.

3	Specify which slide you want the selected slide to follow in the To follow slide number text box.

4	Choose OK.

To customize the List heading bar,

1	Position the mouse pointer on any blank space on the heading bar.

2	Click the mouse button to display a Pop-up Menu.

3	Choose an item from the Pop-up Menu to add that item to the heading bar.

To rearrange the List heading bar,

1	Drag a column heading to a new position on the heading bar.

To delete a column in the List heading bar,

1	Drag the column heading off the heading bar.

To resize a column in the List heading bar,

1	Drag the edge of the column heading to the left or right.

To change the information in the list,

1	Place the pointer on the item you want to edit.

2	Click the right mouse button, then make the desired changes in the dialog box that displays.

3	Choose OK.

To exit the list and view the selected slide,

1	Click [image] at the bottom of the screen.

or... Double-click the slide title.

or... Choose Slide Show from the View menu, then choose Slide Editor.

See Also

Save Slide List Layout on Exit

Slide Show

Slide Show Outliner

Slide Show Slide Editor

Slide Sorter


Slide Sorter

View, Slide Show, Slide Sorter

Use the Slide Sorter to display an overview of your slide show and to change the slide order.

To use the Slide Sorter,

1	Click [image] at the bottom of the screen.  (You can also choose Slide Show from the View menu, then choose Slide Sorter.)

2	If you want to change the order of a slide, drag the slide to a new position.

See Also

Preferences Slide Show

Slide Show

Slide Show List

Slide Show Slide Editor

Slide Show Outliner


Reveal Codes

View, Reveal Codes

Draw, Bitmap, View, Reveal Codes

Draw, Chart, View, Reveal Codes

Use Reveal Codes to display text formatting codes.

To display formatting codes in a block of text,

1	Click here for instructions on getting into the Text Editor:

2	From the Text Editor, choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

See Also

Bitmap Tool Palette

Retrieve Text

Search and Replace

Text


Ruler

View, Ruler

Use the Ruler to create and align objects with precision.  The Ruler shows the measurements of the current page.

To display or remove the Ruler,

1	Choose Ruler from the View menu.

See Also

Alignment Guides

Crosshair

Grid/Snap Options

Units of Measure


Grid

View, Grid

Use Grid to position objects and text in your document.

To display or remove the grid,

1	Choose Grid from the View menu.

See Also

Alignment Guides

Crosshair

Grid/Snap Options

Snap to Grid


Grid/Snap Options

View, Grid/Snap Options

Use Grid/Snap Options to specify how the grid displays, turn on snap to grid, and change the structure and display of the grid.  You can also define the snap zone for alignment guides you create.

To access Grid/Snap Options,

1	Choose Grid/Snap Options from the View menu.

2	Change the desired Grid/Snap Options.

3	Choose OK.

Choose from the following Grid/Snap options for more information.

Grid Options

Snap to Grid Option

Snap Zone Option

See Also

Alignment Guides

Grid

Ruler

Snap to Grid


Grid Options

View, Grid/Snap Options

Use Grid Options to specify how the grid displays on your screen.

To display or remove the grid,

1	Choose Grid/Snap Options from the View menu.

2	Select Display Grid in the Grid group box.

3	Choose OK.

To change the grid point spacing,

1	Choose Grid/Snap Options from the View menu.

2	Specify the amount of space you want between points on the horizontal axis in the Horizontal Spacing text box.

3	Specify the amount of space you want between points on the vertical axis in the Vertical Spacing text box.

4	Choose OK.

To change the grid point display interval,

1	Choose Grid/Snap Options from the View menu.

2	Specify the interval at which you want the grid points displayed in the Interval text box.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Alignment Guides

Grid

Ruler

Snap to Grid


Snap to Grid Option

View, Grid/Snap Options

Use the Snap to Grid option to turn Snap to Grid on or off.

To turn Snap to Grid on or off,

1	Choose Grid/Snap Options from the View menu.

2	Select Snap to Grid in the Grid group box.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Grid

Snap To Grid


Snap Zone Option

View, Grid/Snap Options

Use Snap Zone to define the area in which items snap to alignment guides in the drawing window.

To define the Snap Zone,

1	Choose Grid/Snap Options from the View menu.

2	Specify a value in the Snap Zone text box.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Alignment Guides

Grid

Snap to Grid


Alignment Guides

View, Ruler

Use the alignment guides to help you align items you are creating or editing.

To place an alignment guide in the drawing window,

1	Choose Ruler from the View menu if the Ruler is not displayed on the screen.

2	Place the pointer on the top ruler, then drag to place a horizontal alignment guide.

or... Place the pointer on the left ruler, then drag to place a vertical alignment guide.

To remove an alignment guide,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette.

or... Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose Item.

2	Drag the alignment guide you want to remove off the drawing window.

See Also

Grid

Grid/Snap Options

Snap to Grid

Snap Zone Option


Snap to Grid

View, Snap to Grid

Use Snap to Grid to align items with the grid points as you create them.

To turn Snap to Grid on or off,

1	Choose Snap to Grid from the View menu.

See Also

Alignment Guides

Grid

Grid/Snap Options


Zoom

View, Zoom

Use the options on the Zoom menu to magnify or reduce the view of the document.

Area

Full Page

Drawing Area

Selected Objects

Actual Size (1:1)

Previous

In

Out


Area

View, Zoom, Area

Use Area to magnify your view of an area in your drawing.

To magnify an area of your drawing,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette, then click [image].  (You can also choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose Area.)

2	Move the cross symbol in the magnifying glass pointer to the starting point of the area you want to enlarge, then drag to define the area.

See Also

Actual Size (1:1)

Drawing Area

In

Out

Previous

Selected Objects


 Hint

Area changes your vantage point of an area in your drawing, but it does not size objects.


 Hint

The pointer appears as a magnifying glass.


Full Page

View, Zoom, Full Page

Use Full Page to display an entire page of the document.

To view the full page,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette, then click [image].  (You can also choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose Full Page.)

See Also

Actual Size (1:1)

Area

Drawing Area

In

Out

Previous

Selected Objects


Selected Objects

View, Zoom, Selected Objects

Use Selected Objects to magnify your view of objects you have selected.

To enlarge your view of an object in a drawing,

1	Select the object(s).

2	Click [image] from the tool palette, then click [image].  (You can also choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose Selected Objects.)

See Also

Actual Size (1:1)

Area

Drawing Area

Full Page

In

Out

Previous


 Hint

The Selected Objects feature changes your vantage point of an area in your drawing, but it does not size objects.


Actual Size (1:1)

View, Zoom, Actual Size (1:1)

Use Actual Size (1:1) to display your drawing in the size it would appear if printed.

To view the print size of your drawing,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette, then click [image].  (You can also choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose Actual Size (1:1).)

See Also

Area

Drawing Area

Full Page

In

Out

Previous

Selected Objects


Previous

View, Zoom, Previous

Use Previous to display the drawing as it appeared before you last used a Zoom feature.

To return to the previous view,

1	Choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose Previous.

See Also

Actual Size (1:1)

Area

Drawing Area

Full Page

In

Out

Selected Objects


In

View, Zoom, In

Use In to magnify your view of the items in the drawing window by 20 percent.

To zoom in,

1	Choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose In.

See Also

Actual Size (1:1)

Area

Drawing Area

Full Page

Out

Previous

Selected Objects


 Hint

In changes your vantage point of objects in the drawing window, but it does not size those objects.


Out

View, Zoom, Out

Use Out to reduce your view of items in the drawing window by 20 percent.

To zoom out,

1	Choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose Out.

See Also

Actual Size (1:1)

Area

Drawing Area

Full Page

In

Previous

Selected Objects


 Hint

Out changes your vantage point of objects in the drawing window, but it does not size those objects.


Drawing Area

View, Zoom, Drawing Area

Use Drawing Area to display the drawing window.  This is the default view.

To view the drawing area,

1	Click [image] from the tool palette, then click [image].  (You can also choose Zoom from the View menu, then choose Drawing Area.)

See Also

Actual Size (1:1)

Area

Full Page

In

Out

Previous

Selected Objects